tekla basic

527
Tekla Structures Basic Training Tekla Structures 10.0 April 28, 2004 Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Upload: catalin-caraza

Post on 03-Jan-2016

398 views

Category:

Documents


5 download

DESCRIPTION

Training Tekla for beginners

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 28, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 2: Tekla Basic
Page 3: Tekla Basic

Contents

Contents ........................................................................................................................ i

1 Basic Modeling ............................................................................................................ 3

1.1 Starting Tekla Structures ...........................................................................................................3 1.2 Create a New Model – BasicModel1..........................................................................................4 1.3 Create Grids ..............................................................................................................................7 1.4 Create Plane Views Along Grid Lines........................................................................................8 1.5 Create Foundations .................................................................................................................11 1.6 Create Steel Members.............................................................................................................16 1.7 Create Concrete Members ......................................................................................................31

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Basic Modeling

Page 4: Tekla Basic
Page 5: Tekla Basic

1 Basic Modeling

We will go through the basic functions of Tekla Structures: How to create a new structural 3D model, how to create grids (i.e. module lines), grid views and structural members in the model. As a result of this lesson the model will look as shown below.

In this lesson

1.1 Starting Tekla Structures To start Tekla Structures, click the Windows Start button. Navigate through Programs > Tekla Structures > Singleuser > Tekla Structures enu Europe. This will start Tekla Structures in European environment using English language.

Starting Tekla Structures

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Basic Modeling

Page 6: Tekla Basic

The modeling user interface is now opened. At first, most of the menu options and all the icons are gray indicating that they are inactive. When you open an existing model or create a new model, the icons and available menu options become active.

1.2 Create a New Model – BasicModel1 To start a new model, you first need to create an empty model database with a unique name. In this lesson use the name BasicModel1.

1. Select File > New… from the pull-down menu or click the New model icon in the Standard toolbar to open the New model dialog box.

Start a new model

2. At the lower left corner of the dialog box, Tekla Structures suggests the name New Model for the model. The full path of the model folder is shown in this field.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 7: Tekla Basic

3. Click after the folder path, for example C:\TeklaStructuresModels\ and replace the New Model name by BasicModel1. Accept the default option of Tekla Structures to Create default view and grid.

4. Click the OK button to create the new model.

The menus and icons become activated and the model name appears in the title bar of the Tekla Structures window.

Every model must have a unique name. Tekla Structures does not allow duplicate model names. Do not use special marks ( / \ ; : | ) in model names.

You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that model.

As we had the Create default view and grid checkbox selected, Tekla Structures automatically created a grid and a view according to the saved standard view properties. The default 3D view and grid are shown below.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Basic Modeling

Page 8: Tekla Basic

Cyan dash-and-dot lines show the projections of the grids which are visible on the view plane. Tekla Structures indicates the work area of a view using green, dashed lines. For more information, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Basics.

To save the model: Save the model

Select File > Save from the pull-down menu or click the Save icon in the Standard toolbar.

Remember to save your model every now and then, and always when opening another model or exiting Tekla Structures.

Tekla Structures includes also an auto save feature that backs up and saves your work automatically at set intervals. These are set in the Autosave properties dialog box obtained from the Setup > Autosave… pull-down menu.

For more information on saving and auto saving, see:

Help: Modeling > Getting started > Saving a model and exiting Tekla Structures

Most commands of Tekla Structures are found both in menus (main or pop-up) and in toolbars (icons). In this training manual we will mainly use the pop-up menu to activate commands.

There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures:

• Icons

• Commands in main pull-down menu

• Commands in pop-up menu

By default all the commands are found in pull-down menu, most of them in the icons. A pop-up menu appears when you click the right mouse button (right-click). If you have an object selected, the commands on the pop-up menu relate to that object.

For more information on Tekla Structures screen layout and toolbars, see:

Help: Modeling > Screen layout

Help: Modeling > Toolbars

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 9: Tekla Basic

1.3 Create Grids

To create the appropriate grid for BasicModel1 as shown above, you can delete the existing grid and create a new one from the Points > Grid… pull-down menu. Alternatively you can modify the existing grid.

To modify the existing grid: Modify the existing grid

1. Double click the grid line.

2. Complete the appearing Grid dialog box as shown below by filling in the X, Y and Z coordinates and the labels for the grid lines.

3. Click Modify to apply the new grid values.

4. Enter the grid file name, GRID1, and click the Save as button to save the grid values for later use. The file GRID1.grd appears in the attributes subfolder of your model folder.

For more information on grids and dialog box buttons, see:

Help: Modeling > Introduction > Inputting information > Common buttons

The number of decimals used in the Grid dialog box (as well as in other modeling dialog boxes) can be controlled from the Units and decimals... dialog box obtained from the Setup pull-down menu.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Basic Modeling

Page 10: Tekla Basic

When the grid was modified, the work area of the view, shown with the green dashed line, was not updated.

To fit the work area according to the modified grid: Fit work area

1. Click the view.

2. Right-click and select Fit work area from the pop-up menu.

The view should now look as shown below:

1.4 Create Plane Views Along Grid Lines We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the grid lines created in the previous section.

A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in its own window inside the Tekla Structures window. Each view has a view plane on which the grids are visible and points are represented as yellow crosses. Points outside the view plane appear as red dots.

For more information, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views.

To create views along grid lines, Create grid views

1. Select one grid line.

2. Right-click and select Create view > Grid views from the pop-up menu to open the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 11: Tekla Basic

3. Click the Show… button of the XY view plane to open the View properties dialog box.

4. Change the Angle and View depth values as shown below and click OK to close the dialog box.

5. Select the number of views as All and click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

The Views dialog box appears presenting all the created views. All invisible named views are listed on the left, and all visible views on the right.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Basic Modeling

Page 12: Tekla Basic

For more information on view properties, see:

Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views > View properties

To display or hide views: Display or hide views

1. Click the Open named view list icon to open the Views dialog box (which is now already open).

2. Select the view(s) you want to display or hide.

3. Use the arrows to move view(s) from left to right (visible) or vice versa (invisible).

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 13: Tekla Basic

Do not keep too many views open at the same time. Nine is the maximum number of open views. You can open or close named views by clicking the Open named view list icon. Delete unnecessary views from the view list.

To switch between views, press Ctrl+Tab.

You can rotate the model in a 3D view with rendered view type. Rotate the model

1. Press the key V.

2. In the view, pick a center of rotation.

3. Hold down the Ctrl key, and click and drag with the middle mouse button.

With the shortcut Ctrl+P you can change the view angle between 3D and Plane, which is very useful.

Change between 3D / Plane

1.5 Create Foundations We will now create foundations for the BasicModel1.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Basic Modeling

Page 14: Tekla Basic

Column Footing To create footings for columns: 1800*1800 footing

1. Double-click the Create pad footing icon. This will open Pad footing properties dialog box

2. Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box as shown and click Apply.

3. In the 3d view, pick the intersection of grids A-1 to create the footing.

4. Create the rest of the 1800*1800 footings at other intersections of grid line A by picking each position.

Help: Part position

Help: Profile library / Parametric

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 15: Tekla Basic

You can undo (and redo) previous commands one by one since the last save by clicking the icons shown or typing Ctrl + Z (Undo) and Ctrl + Y (Redo).

While still in the command, 2700*2700 footing

5. Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box for 2700*2700 footing as shown and Apply this.

The footings on grid B need offsetting from the grid line because there will be additional columns modeled afterwards. This offset will be accomplished by adjusting the Vertical Position value in the Pad footing properties dialog box.

6. Create the footings at intersections of the gridline B.

7. Right click and select Interrupt to end the command.

The commands will stay on until you interrupt them.

To end commands right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu, or press the Esc key.

To restart the last command used press Enter.

Foundations for Silos – Parametric Profiles We will create two identical circular foundations for the silos. At first, one foundation will be created at the coordinate 4500,4500,0 and then the other foundation will be created as a copy of the first one.

Tekla Structures contains standard (library), parametric, and user-defined profiles. For the foundation, we will use parametric profiles instead of the library profiles.

Help: Modeling > Parts > Profile

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Appendix A: Parametric Profiles

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Basic Modeling

Page 16: Tekla Basic

1. Double-click the Create pad footing icon. Create footing

2. Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box as shown and click Apply.

You can select the profile of a part from the Select profile dialog box that opens next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box.

You can as well enter a profile name in the Profile field in the part properties dialog box.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 17: Tekla Basic

3. Type 4500,4500 to define the position for the footing (typing the numbers automatically displays the Enter a numeric location dialog box).

4. Click Enter, and the foundation is created.

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Snapping

1. Click the footing once to select it. Copy the footing

2. Right click and select Copy > Translate… from the pop-up menu. Complete the dialog box as shown.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Basic Modeling

Page 18: Tekla Basic

3. Click Copy.

Now the footings should look like those shown below:

1.6 Create Steel Members

Columns We will first create two of the columns and then use the Copy command to create the other columns.

To create the first two columns: Create columns

1. Double-click the Create column icon.

2. Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown below, and then click Apply.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 19: Tekla Basic

3. Pick the intersection of grids A-1 to create one column, and then pick grid B-1 to create the second column.

1. Select the columns that you just created by dragging a window across them. Copy columns

2. Right click and select Copy > Translate… from the pop-up menu. Complete the dialog box as shown below and click Copy.

Now all the columns appear in the model.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Basic Modeling

Page 20: Tekla Basic

When identical structures appear in the model, you can alternatively create one footing (and its reinforcement), the steel column on top of it and the base plate connection between the footing and the column, and copy this structural entity to all other positions of similar structures.

You can select multiple parts in the model by holding down the Ctrl-key and picking objects in the model.

Help: Modeling > Introduction > Selecting model objects > How to select objects

Silos We will now model the silos by using solid parametric profiles. A more precise alternative would be to create the silo as a circular hollow section with a contour plate welded on top of it.

1. To create the silos, double-click the Create column icon. Create silos

2. Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown below, and then click Apply.

3. Pick the top point of the first silo footing and then the other.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 21: Tekla Basic

Now the silos appear in the model.

The visibility of objects in views depends on the work area, view depth, view setup, and view filter. You can also temporarily hide parts in a view by using the Hide tool.

In the pictures hereafter all the model objects created may not always be visible.

Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views > Displaying and hiding objects in views

Level 3850 Beams We will first create the beams at the +3850 level and then copy them (using the select filter) to the two upper levels.

1. Open the PLAN +3850 view. Create beams

2. Double-click the Create beam icon.

3. Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown and Apply.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Basic Modeling

Page 22: Tekla Basic

4. In the PLAN +3850 view pick intersection of gridlines A-4 and then B-4.

5. Continue at grid lines 5, 6, and 7.

When inputting horizontal members always pick from left to right or from bottom to top for consistency purposes.

Copy Beams to Upper Levels 1. Choose the select filter option beam_filter from the drop down list. Filter beams

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Filter > Select filter

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 23: Tekla Basic

2. By dragging the mouse, select an area through the model.

1. In the Grid 7 view right-click and select Copy > Translate… from the pop-up menu. Copy beams

2. Pick the grid line intersection B-3850 and then B-7350. Check the values in the dialog box.

3. Click Copy.

4. Copy beams to level +13400 by repeating steps 3-6.

5. Change the select filter option back to standard to enable also the selection of other objects but beams.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Basic Modeling

Page 24: Tekla Basic

Level 13400 Beams Next we will create beams at the view +13400 level.

By using the same beam properties that we applied earlier, create the missing beams at the grid intersections shown in the figure below.

Create grid beams

Next we will create beams in locations where no grid lines intersect. The snapping tools help you pick points to position objects precisely without having to know the coordinates or layout additional lines or points.

Create the rest of the beams

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Snapping

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 25: Tekla Basic

1. Double-click one of the existing beams in the model and press Apply. Create beam A

2. Start the beam command.

3. Make sure only the Snap to reference lines / points icon of the two main snap switches on the right is pressed down.

4. Make sure the Snap to mid points icon is pressed down.

5. Pick a midpoint of the beam between grid A-2 and A-3 and then the midpoint of the beam between grid B-2 and B-3.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Basic Modeling

Page 26: Tekla Basic

We will pick the start position of beam B by using the grid intersection A-1 as a temporary reference point and tracking along grid 1 to the intersection B-1 direction for 9000 units.

Create beam B

We will then pick the second position of beam B using the temporary snap switch Perpendicular.

1. Start the beam command. Pick the first position of beam B 2. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick grid intersection A-1 as the origin to show the “From”

location coordinates.

3. Then use the cursor to snap (Do not pick!!) in the correct direction (e.g. to grid intersection B-1).

4. Type 9000 for the numeric location. (Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically).

5. Press Enter and the cursor snaps to the correct position. (=9000 mm from A-1 in the direction of B-1).

6. Right click and select Perpendicular. Pick second position of beam B

7. Pick the 2nd position on beam A (see below).

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 27: Tekla Basic

While still in the beam command, Create beam C

8. Right click and select Intersection for snap override.

9. Pick the intersection of beam B and grid 2 and then the intersection of grid B-2.

We will first create one of the beams that frame around the silo and then by using the Copy > Rotate command create the other three.

Create beam D

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools Settings and tools reference > Edit > Copy > rotate

1. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick grid intersection A-1 to show the “From” location coordinates, use the cursor to snap (Do not pick!!) in the correct direction. (E.g. grid intersection B-1).

2. Type 4000 for the numeric location and press Enter, the cursor snaps to the correct position.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Basic Modeling

Page 28: Tekla Basic

3. Press the letter O on the keyboard, to snap to positions in orthogonal directions on the work plane (0, 45, 90, 135, and 180 degrees).

4. Let the cursor to snap to the midpoint as shown below and pick.

5. Press the letter O to turn the ortho off.

1. Select the beam that you just created. Copy rotate the beam

2. Right click and select Copy > Rotate… from the pop-up menu.

3. Pick the center point of the silo as the point to define the rotation (select a view in which the silos are visible and pick near the circumference to snap to the center point). The origin X0 and Y0 values will appear in the dialog box.

4. Complete the other fields in the dialog.

5. Click Copy.

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 29: Tekla Basic

We will now copy the beams to the other silo. Copy translate the beam to the other silo 1. Select the beams shown highlighted in the picture (press the Ctrl key to add parts to the

selection).

2. Copy > translate… them 9000 mm in the x direction.

Bracing Working in the Grid A elevation view, we will input the vertical bracing members using the Create beam tool.

1. Double-click the Create beam icon. Create braces a and b

2. Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown and Apply.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 27 Basic Modeling

Page 30: Tekla Basic

3. In the 3d view create brace a by first picking the grid intersection A-2 and then the midpoint of column A-3.

4. Create brace b by picking the top position of column A-2 and then midpoint of column A-3.

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 31: Tekla Basic

We can see from the drawing above that the lower end of the brace needs 200 mm offsetting from the grid. Now we will use the handles to move the part end.

Use handle to move brace end

Help: Handles

1. Select brace a to display the handles.

2. Pick the yellow handle (Tekla Structures then highlights the handle).

3. Right click and select Move > Translate… to move the handle 200 mm upwards.

4. Click Move.

5. Repeat the procedure to move brace b’s top handle 800 mm downwards.

1. Select braces a and b. Copy mirror braces a and b

2. Right click and select Copy > Mirror…

3. In the 3d view, pick grid A-3 then grid B-3 to define the mirror line.

4. Click Copy.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 29 Basic Modeling

Page 32: Tekla Basic

Help: Copy > Mirror

Now we have modeled all the steel members in Model1. The model should look like in the figure below.

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 33: Tekla Basic

1.7 Create Concrete Members

Concrete Hollow Core Slabs We will now create concrete hollow core slabs. Instead of positioning the slabs to the grid line intersection we will model the slabs to the face of the steel columns.

In the PLAN +13400 view: Create hollow core slabs

1. Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon.

2. Complete the Concrete beam properties dialog box as shown and Apply.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 31 Basic Modeling

Page 34: Tekla Basic

3. Pick the intersection of the column flange outer face and gridline 4 then intersection the column flange outer face and grid line5 (be sure that the Snap to geometry lines/points is pressed).

4. Click the middle mouse button to create the slab.

1. Select the slab that you just created. Copy the slabs in Y direction

2. Right click and select Copy > Translate… from the pop-up menu.

3. Type 1200 in the dY field of the Copy – translate dialog box and 10 as the number of copies.

1. Drag an area select, choosing all the concrete slabs. Copy the slabs in X direction

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 35: Tekla Basic

2. Right click and select Copy > Translate… from the pop-up menu.

3. Type 6000 in the dX field of the Copy - translate dialog box.

4. Click Copy.

Copy Concrete Hollow Core Slabs to Levels 7350 and 3850 1. Hold down Ctrl key and choose all the hollow core slabs by dragging 3 areas through the

slabs. Copy the slabs

2. Still holding down Ctrl key pick the two slabs shown in the picture below to unselect them (we will create stairs here in a later chapter).

3. Right click and select Copy > Translate… from the pop-up menu.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 33 Basic Modeling

Page 36: Tekla Basic

4. Enter -6050 in the dZ field of the Copy – translate dialog box, click Copy.

5. Enter -9550 in the dZ field of the Copy – translate dialog box, click Copy.

Concrete Slab

1. Double-click the Create concrete slab icon. Start the slab command

2. Complete the Concrete slab properties dialog box as shown and Apply.

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 37: Tekla Basic

3. In the PLAN +13400 view pick point A (intersection of column flange outer face and gridline 1, shown in the previous figure).

Pick positions for the slab

4. Let the cursor snap to position just picked (do not pick!) and press Y to lock the Y coordinate.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 35 Basic Modeling

Page 38: Tekla Basic

5. Let the cursor now to snap to the end point of beam near point B and pick.

6. Press Y to release the coordinate lock.

7. Pick point C.

8. Pick point D.

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling

Page 39: Tekla Basic

9. Click middle button to create the slab.

1. Select the slab that you just created. Copy concrete slab

2. Copy translate the slab 9000 mm in X direction.

Now the Model1 framework is finished.

Links to additional information Help: Modeling > Introduction > General informationSingle user mode vs. multiuser mode

Help: Modeling > Introduction > General information > Languages and environments

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 37 Basic Modeling

Page 40: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 23, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 41: Tekla Basic
Page 42: Tekla Basic

Contents

2 Creating System Connections....................................................................................3

2.1 About System Connections .......................................................................................................3 2.2 Column Base Plates ..................................................................................................................5 2.3 Beam to Beam Web ..................................................................................................................8 2.4 Beam to Column Web .............................................................................................................11 2.5 Beam to Column Flange..........................................................................................................17 2.6 Create AutoDefaults Rules ......................................................................................................18 2.7 Use AutoDefaults Rules ..........................................................................................................23

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Contents

Page 43: Tekla Basic
Page 44: Tekla Basic

2 Creating System Connections

This lesson introduces the basics of creating system connections in Tekla Structures. In this lesson

You will learn how to:

• Create connections

• Work with connection properties

• Save the properties for later use

• Work with AutoDefaults, i.e. create rules to apply pre-defined connection properties automatically

2.1 About System Connections You can model connections quickly with the Tekla Structures system connections.

The greatest benefits of using system connections are:

• The connection properties can be saved with a particular name so that they can be used later. These properties can then be used for all projects.

• When you modify a main objects profile in the model all of the connections to the object are automatically modified at the same time.

• If you select options such as edit, copy, or mirror, all connections are automatically included. The connections that are copied or mirrored are exactly the same as the originals. The same applies to plates and bolts.

• With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different connection properties.

All available system connections are located on the connection toolbars, which can be found at the right of the main window.

When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and create the connection. Then look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quicker than trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actually creates.

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Getting started > Using connections > Creating connections

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Getting started > Basics > connection concepts

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Picking order

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Creating System Connections

Page 45: Tekla Basic

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Up direction

Check Clashing of Steel Structures In Chapter 1 we created a model of a small industrial structure. To complete the model we will need to connect the parts. Before creating the connections usually all of the members in the model collide with other members.

By using the Clash check command we can check which parts in the model collide. We will run a clash check now and then again after the connections have been applied.

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Querying objects > Clash check

1. Select all of the parts of the model by dragging an area select around the whole model. Check clashing

2. Right-click and select Clash check.

Tekla Structures highlights the colliding parts in yellow and displays the clash check log in the List dialog box. You can see that all of the parts in the model collide.

Select any clashing parts from the list and Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 46: Tekla Basic

2.2 Column Base Plates The first system connections that we will add are the column base plate details.

First we will create a base plate using the default values. We will then modify the properties of the base plate and finally create the rest of the base plates with the new properties.

1. From the page 5 connection toolbar, double-click the Base plate (1004) icon. Create base plate to one column

2. Following dialog appears:

3. Click OK to accept the default values.

4. Pick any column.

5. When prompted, pick the bottom endpoint of the column as the position and the base plate will be created.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Creating System Connections

Page 47: Tekla Basic

6. Use the shortcut Ctrl+2 to set the parts displayed in shaded wire frame.

You can see that the anchor bolts were created just as ordinary bolts.

We will change the bolts in the base plate to anchor rods by modifying the connection properties.

Add anchor rods to base plates

1. Double-click the green connection symbol; the Base plate dialog box will reopen.

2. Select the Anchor rods page in the dialog box.

3. Edit the values in the fields shown highlighted in the figure below.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 48: Tekla Basic

4. Click Modify and the bolts become anchor bars.

5. Click OK to accept the properties for use later.

1. Press the Enter key to start the base plate command again. Create base plates to rest of the columns

To repeat the last command, do one of the following:

• Click Edit -> Repeat last command

Press Enter

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Creating System Connections

Page 49: Tekla Basic

2. Create the rest of the base plates by picking each column and then the position for the base plate.

2.3 Beam to Beam Web

Shear Plates We will use the Shear plate simple (146) connection to make the beam to beam web connections. The shear plate will be welded to the primary beam web and bolted to the secondary beam web. We will use the connection both when the secondary beam is perpendicular to the main member or at a skewed angle to the main member.

1. From the page 1 connection toolbar, double-click the Shear plate simple (146) icon. Create one shear plate connection

Following dialog appears:

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 50: Tekla Basic

2. Pick the beam on grid line 1 as the main part of the connection.

3. Pick the beam perpendicular to the main part to be the secondary part and the connection will be created.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Creating System Connections

Page 51: Tekla Basic

Check the Connection To make it easier to check the connection you created you can create views from different sides of a selected connection. In the view the work area is closely fitted around the connection.

To create component basic views: Create connection basic views

1. Select the connection symbol.

2. Right-click and select Create view > Component basic views, four basic views (front, top end and perspective) appear.

3. Keep the Component front view open and close the other component basic views.

We will now check the bolt location distances and bolt edge distances between bolts and the shear plate.

Check bolt dimensions

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Querying objects > Measure

1. Click Tools > Measure > Bolt measure.

2. Pick the bolt group.

3. Pick the shear plate and the temporary dimensions are shown in the view.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 52: Tekla Basic

Now we will accept the created connection’s with the default properties.

With the connection’s applied properties, create shear plate connections to all of the rest of the beam to beam conditions.

Create the rest of the shear plates

2.4 Beam to Column Web We will use the End plate (144) connection to make the beam to column web connections.

For the double sided beam to column web connections we will use the Two sided end plate (142) connection. That connection uses only one bolt group to go through all three parts.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Creating System Connections

Page 53: Tekla Basic

We will then make the wall brace to column connections with Tube gusset (20). The connection uses a gusset plate to connect the beam to the column. Connection plates welded to the end of the braces will be bolted to gusset plate.

End Plate We will now use the End plate (144) connection to make all of the beam to column web connections using the default connection properties. We will modify the properties later with AutoDefaults.

1. On the page 1 connection toolbar, double-click the End plate (144) icon. Create end plates

2. Make an end plate connection at every beam to column web condition where there is only one secondary beam coming to the column web.

Two Sided End Plate Create the two sided end plate connection to all the double sided beam to column web condition to connect beams to both sides of the column web:

1. Double-click the Two sided end plate (142) icon. Create two sided end plates

2. When prompted, pick the column as the main part.

3. Pick each beam as a secondary part.

4. Click the middle mouse button to complete the connection.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 54: Tekla Basic

When there are multiple secondaries you need to click the middle mouse button to complete the selection.

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Picking order

Wall Bracing –Tube Gusset We will connect all the wall braces to columns using Tube gusset (20) connections and after that modify their properties all at once.

1. From the page 4 connection toolbar, double-click the Tube gusset (20) icon. Create tube gusset to intersection of braces

2. Pick the column on the grid intersection A-3 as the main part.

3. Pick the four braces one by one as secondaries.

4. Click middle mouse button to create the connection.

Now we can see that the connection created has only one gusset plate which goes through the column.

We could have created a separate gusset plate at each side of the column by creating two separate connections.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Creating System Connections

Page 55: Tekla Basic

While still in the command, create the connections to the other ends of the braces by doing the following:

Create the rest of the tube gussets

1. Pick the column.

2. Pick the brace.

3. Click middle mouse button to create the connection.

Create Component basic views of the tube gusset connection connecting the four braces. Check one tube gusset connection In the Component front view you can see that there is no clearance from the gusset plates to

the column web.

To see the column web in the connection front view you can change the view type in the view properties dialog to rendered.

Modify the Connection We will modify the connection by adding 15 mm clearance between the gusset plates and the column. We will also change the number of vertical bolt rows from 2 to 1.

1. Double-click the connection symbol. Add clearance between the gusset plate and the column

2. On the Picture tab type 15 in the field defining the clearance between gusset plate and the column.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 56: Tekla Basic

3. In the Tubebolts1, Tubebolts2 and Tubebolts3 tab pages edit the number of horizontal and vertical bolt rows as shown in the figures below.

Edit the number of bolt rows

4. Click Modify and then Apply.

The Tubebolts1 tab effects the first picked brace, Tubebolts2 tab the second pick and Tubebolts3 picks 3-9.

Check that the number of bolt rows was changed and that the clearance is correct. Check the changes

To check the clearance:

1. Click the Create X measure icon.

2. Pick the starting and end points as shown:

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Creating System Connections

Page 57: Tekla Basic

3. Pick a point to locate the dimension.

4. Repeat for the other dimensions you want to check.

Now we will also modify the other tube gusset connections with the new properties we applied.

We can easily modify only connections of the same type shown in the connection dialog by selecting Ignore other types in the connection dialog box.

Modify all the tube gusset connections at once 1. Check that the Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box.

Help: Modifying connections

2. Select all the connections in the model by using the Select component select switch shown below and dragging a window around the whole model.

3. Click Modify.

We will now save the edited properties for later use.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 58: Tekla Basic

By saving the properties with a descriptive name you can easily use them later. You can also get AutoDefaults to automatically use the saved properties in desired cases by setting up AutoDefaults rules.

4. Type Wall bracings in the Save as field in the dialog box. Save the properties

5. Click the Save as button.

2.5 Beam to Column Flange We will now create End plate (144) connections to all of the beam to column flange conditions by using the default properties.

Then we will edit one of the connection’s properties. Instead of modifying the rest of the connections with the new properties, in the next section, we will create AutoDefaults rules to define when certain properties will be used.

End Plate 1. Double-click the End plate (144) icon. Create end plates

2. Create connections at all of the beam to column flange framing conditions.

Change the Number of Bolt Rows and Save the Properties We will now change the number of bolt rows to eight when the secondary beam is IPE600. We will then save the new properties with a specific name so that we will be able to use them in AutoDefaults.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Creating System Connections

Page 59: Tekla Basic

We will also save properties with seven bolt rows for later use with IPE500 beams.

1. Double-click one of the connections we just created to open the connection dialog box. 8 bolt rows to IPE600

2. On the Bolts tab input 8 as the number of bolt rows.

3. Click Modify.

4. Type 8_bolt_rows in the Save as field in the dialog box and click Save as.

5. On the Bolts page input 7 as the number of bolt rows. 7 bolt rows to IPE500

6. Use Save as to save the properties as 7_bolt_rows.

2.6 Create AutoDefaults Rules With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different pre-defined connection properties. When the connections need to be modified (for example changing the beam size), Tekla Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using AutoDefaults rules defined by you.

New Rule Group: Industrial Building Rules We will now create a new AutoDefaults rule group named Industrial building rules.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 60: Tekla Basic

This rule group could include all the rules needed to define when to use certain pre-defined connection properties for the entire project.

Help: System > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults setup > AutoDefaults setup

We will now define two simple rules for the End plate (144) connection.

1. When the secondary is an IPE500, the end plate connection will have 7 bolt rows.

2. When secondary is an IPE600, the end plate connection will have 8 bolt rows.

When the secondary is neither of the above (IPE500 or IPE600) the default rule will be met and the standard properties will be used.

1. Click Setup > AutoDefaults… to open AutoDefaults setup dialog box. Create new rule group: Industrial building rules 2. Right-click in the dialog and select New rule group, a rule group named New appears.

3. Select the New rule group, press the F2 key and type: Industrial building rules.

4. Browse to Industrial building rules > Components 1 > End plate (144). Create new rule sets for end plate

5. Right-click the connection Endplate (144) and select Create additional rule sets.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Creating System Connections

Page 61: Tekla Basic

6. Two rule sets: New and Default appear in the tree. By default, both rule sets have standard connection properties selected.

IPE 600 Rule Set 1. Right-click the rule set New and select Edit rule set... to open the AutoDefault Rules

dialog box. Add rule to rule set New

2. Select the rule Secondary 1 profile from the Available rules list.

3. Click the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list of rules in the rule set.

4. In the right pane under Exact value, fill in IPE600. Enter name for rule set

5. Enter a name for the rule set: Secondary IPE600.

6. Click OK.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 62: Tekla Basic

We have used the End plate (144) connection both in beam to column web and beam to column flange cases so the rule will now be used in both cases.

We could make this rule to work only in beam to beam flange cases by setting another rule: Secondary beam to beam flange TRUE.

7. Select the standard.j144 parameters, right-click and pick Select connection parameters…

Select connection parameters

8. This opens Attribute file list in which all the saved properties for connection 144 are listed.

9. Select the 8_bolt_rows properties and click OK.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Creating System Connections

Page 63: Tekla Basic

IPE 500 Rule Set We will now create another rule set for IPE500 taking advantage of the IPE600 rule set we just created.

1. Select the rules set Secondary IPE600, right-click and select Copy rule set. Copy and modify rule set

2. While the rule set Secondary IPE600 is still selected, right-click again and select Paste rule set.

We now have two identical rule sets.

3. Select the upper Secondary IPE600 rule set, right-click and select Edit rule set…

4. Modify the value in the rule to IPE500 and the Rule set name to Secondary IPE500 and click OK.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 64: Tekla Basic

5. Select the properties 8_bolt_rows under the rule set Secondary IPE500, right-click and pick Select connection parameters…

6. Select the parameters: 7_bolt_rows and click OK.

7. Finally click OK in the AutoDefaults setup dialog box.

Now the new AutoDefaults rules are ready for use.

2.7 Use AutoDefaults Rules We will now use the Industrial building rules created to automatically apply the correct properties to the existing End plate (144) connections.

Switch the AutoDefaults On in the End Plate Connections 1. Open the End plate (144) connection dialog box.

2. On the General tab select Industrial building rules.

3. Click the on/off button and tick only the Rule Group check box.

4. Check that the Ignore other types is selected.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Creating System Connections

Page 65: Tekla Basic

5. Save as ipe600.

6. Select all of the connections in the model.

7. Click Modify.

Since all the secondaries in our end plate connection are IPE600, they all pass the Secondary IPE 600 rule and result in having the same properties, 8_bolt_rows.

Change profiles – AutoDefaults React Let’s now assume that first and second floor beams on gridlines 4 and 7 don't have as much load as others and we can change their profiles to IPE500.

1. Double-click one of the beams selected in the figure below to open the beam properties dialog box.

Change the profiles

2. Change the profile to IPE500 and tick only the profile check box.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 66: Tekla Basic

3. Select the four beams shown highlighted in the figure below and click Modify.

You can see that the connections in the modified beams were updated to have 7 rows of bolts.

1. Select one of the connection symbols of the changed profiles. Inquire the properties used

2. Right-click and select Inquire.

From the inquire object dialog box you can check which rule group, particular rule and connection attributes were used.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Creating System Connections

Page 67: Tekla Basic

Check Clashing Again Now that we have connected all the steel parts in our model we will run the clash check again.

1. Select all of the parts by dragging an area select around the whole model. Check clashing

2. Right-click and select Clash check.

To quickly locate and view colliding parts in the model, select a line containing the ID numbers of colliding parts from the list. Tekla Structures highlights the parts in the model.

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating System Connections

Page 68: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 23, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 69: Tekla Basic
Page 70: Tekla Basic

Contents

3 Creating Interactive Connections...............................................................................3

3.1 Create Gusset Plate with Stiffeners Interactively.......................................................................3 3.2 Creating an End Plate Connection from Scratch .......................................................................9 3.3 Create Cuts Interactively .........................................................................................................25

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Contents

Page 71: Tekla Basic
Page 72: Tekla Basic

3 Creating Interactive Connections

Tekla Structures system connections cover a great variety of the connections used in most projects. However, you may come across situations where it's not possible to make the necessary connections in your model using the system connections.

In this lesson

In this chapter we will take advantage of the Tekla Structures tube gusset connection by using it as a base for a connection. We will explode the system connection, modify the ungrouped objects and then add objects to connection using a system connection detail.

We will also create a whole new connection (i.e. all connection objects: parts, welds, bolts and cuts) interactively from scratch without using any system connections.

3.1 Create Gusset Plate with Stiffeners Interactively

In Tekla Structures there is no gusset plate system connection available in which you can get the stiffeners included in the connection. You can however create the stiffeners separately by using a system connection detail.

We will explode an existing tube gusset connection, modify the gusset plate shape and then create stiffeners in the connection using a system connection detail.

Near the bottom end of the column at grid A-2 is a Tube Gusset (20) connection.

In the figure on the left we see the connection before the stiffeners have been added. In the figure on the right we see how the connection will look after the stiffeners have been added.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 73: Tekla Basic

Select the connection symbol, right-click and select Create view > Component basic views. Create component basic views

Explode Gusset Plate Connection Inside of the system connection we are not able to reshape the gusset plate the way it is shown in figure above.

In situations where the connection parameters do not contain a particular option, we must edit the parts outside of the connection.

In order to modify connection objects outside the connection, we need to explode the connection. Exploding ungroups the objects in a connection. Modifications when done outside of the connection dialog without first exploding the connection will result in the changes being overwritten if the connection were to get updated.

Before exploding the connection you should take advantage of the connection to get as close to the desired result as possible since editing connection macros is faster and easier than editing objects outside the connection.

To explode the connection: Explode connection

Select gusset plate’s connection symbol, right-click and select Explode component.

All connection objects (even if they are set to "not visible "in the view properties) will become visible. Now all of these objects have lost intelligence and association to the connection dialog.

After exploding the connection, the objects that were in the connection are no longer connection objects.

They will be presented in the model as objects (main parts) both in wire frame or in shaded wire frame. You can also only select the objects by using the select objects select switch.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 74: Tekla Basic

Reshape the Gusset Plate We will now reshape the gusset plate as shown in the figure below by editing the polygon plate using the Edit polygon shape command.

We will first create a temporary construction line to help to locate the bottom right corner of the gusset plate.

Create a construction line

1. Click the Create construction line icon.

2. Pick the top right corner of the gusset plate as the starting point of the line.

3. Type @0,0,-500 to define the end point of the construction line (-500 mm in the Z direction from the last picked point).

As you type, the Enter a numeric location dialog box is automatically displayed.

4. Press Enter and the construction line is created

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 75: Tekla Basic

Instead of recreating the polygon plate we will now reshape the existing plate by using the Edit > Polygon shape command.

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands >Edit polygon shape

Edit polygon shape

1. Select Edit > Polygon shape and follow the instructions on the command line.

2. Pick gusset plate corner (1), see the figure below.

3. Pick intersection of gusset plate edge and the construction line (2).

4. Snap to perpendicular point in gusset plate edge and pick point (3). (Make sure you pick the plate edge instead of grid line).

5. Pick gusset plate top left corner (4).

6. Pick bottom corner (5) as the corner to be removed, the plate is now reshaped.

The construction line is no longer needed and you can delete it.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 76: Tekla Basic

Add Stiffeners We will now add stiffeners to our connection using the Multiple Stiffeners (1064) detail. When we open the detail’s dialog box we can see which options are available to us for creating the stiffeners. In this case we are interested in setting the stiffener spacing and the edge distance from the edge of the stiffener to the edge of the column. We can then measure the column to get the parameters exactly as desired.

1. In the model take the following measurements: Click the Create X measure icon, pick the points and a place for the dimension as shown below:

Measure dimensions

2. Click the Create Y measure icon, pick the points and a place for the dimension as shown below:

1. Double-click the Multiple stiffeners (1064) icon located on the page 5 connection toolbar.

Create stiffeners using macro

2. Edit the fields shown highlighted on each of the tab pages below and click Apply (study the association with the dimensions taken in the model and note the tolerances).

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 77: Tekla Basic

3. Pick the column.

4. Pick the midpoint of the gusset plate, the stiffeners are created.

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 78: Tekla Basic

You can see the final results in the figures below.

We could now explode the stiffener detail but since we have not edited the connection objects outside of the way that the detail was created we can also just leave it.

In the next lesson, Lesson 4: Custom element, you will learn to group objects in your own user-defined connections.

3.2 Creating an End Plate Connection from Scratch

Sometimes you may need to create all of the objects for a connection interactively from scratch. As an example we will now create plates, polygon cut, fitting, bolt group and welds interactively in order to create the connection shown below.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 79: Tekla Basic

Create Plate and Fitting for the Beam At the grid intersection B-3 at level 13400:

1. Select the existing end plate connection, right-click and select Create view > Component basic views.

Create connection basic views and delete the connection 2. Delete the existing connection.

We will now use the beam command to create the end plate for the beam. Create end plate for the beam

1. Start the beam command and Apply the properties for the end plate shown in the dialog box below.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 80: Tekla Basic

It is possible to create plates by using either the beam or the contour plate command.

In the Component front view:

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the intersection of the beam lower flange and the column flange (1) to set the “From” location coordinates.

3. Then use the cursor to snap (Do not pick!) the top right corner of the column (2) to set the correct direction.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 81: Tekla Basic

4. Type 10 for the numeric location (the Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically) and press Enter.

The cursor picks to the desired start position (which equals 10 mm from point 1 in the direction of point 2).

5. To pick the end position hold down the Ctrl key and pick position (2). Then use the cursor to snap to position (1). Type 10 for the numeric location and press Enter (which equals 10 mm from point 2 to direction of point 1).

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 82: Tekla Basic

The plate then appears.

We will use the Fitting command to trim the end of the beam at the end plate. Fit the end of a beam

The Fitting tool will trim the end of the beam on a plane perpendicular to the view plane, which is defined by picking 2 points on a line.

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Fine tuning part shape > Fitting

1. Click the Create fitting icon.

2. Select the beam as the part to be fitted.

3. Pick the points on the end plate corners to set the cut line for the fitting.

Tekla Structures displays the fitting in the model using a blue fitting symbol.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 83: Tekla Basic

Create Plate for the Column

We will now use the Create contour plate command to create a plate for the column. We will use the Component end view for ease of picking points to place the plate. We will then move the plate to the correct depth.

Help: Modeling > Parts > Steel parts commands > Contour plate

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 84: Tekla Basic

1. Start the Create contour plate command. Create column plate

2. Apply the properties for the plate as shown below:

In the Component end view:

3. Let the cursor snap to the top left corner of the end plate and type Z to lock the Z coordinate.

4. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the top left corner of the column to set the “From” location coordinates.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 85: Tekla Basic

5. Let the cursor snap to the inner side of the flange shown, type 5 and press Enter.

The first point for the plate is now picked.

6. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the top right corner of the column to set the “From” location coordinates.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 86: Tekla Basic

7. Let the cursor snap to the inner side of the flange, type 5 and press Enter.

8. The second point is now picked.

9. Press Z to release the coordinate lock.

10. Let the cursor snap to the bottom right corner of the end plate and type Z to lock the Z coordinate.

11. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to pick the third point for the plate.

12. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to pick the last position for the plate.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 87: Tekla Basic

13. Press Z to release the coordinate.

14. Press the middle button to create the plate.

The plate is created in the view plane of the Component end view.

1. Select the column connection plate, right-click and select Move > Translate... Move the plate

2. Move the plate in the X direction (and only X) so that it is next to the end plate.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 88: Tekla Basic

Fitting the Column The column connection plate is now in the correct position but it collides with the column flanges. We will use the Create part cut command to cut the column with the plate. We will then enlarge the antimatter cut to add some clearance between the plate and the column flanges.

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Part cut

1. Click the Create part cut icon. Create part cut for the column

2. Pick the column as the part to be cut.

3. Pick plate as cutting part.

The column is now cut exactly along the edges of the connection plate.

We will next enlarge the antimatter cut.

Since the column connection plate and the part cut are now in exactly the same space, it would be hard to select correct chamfers to modify.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 89: Tekla Basic

That's why we will temporarily hide the column connection plate and then move the cut chamfers.

1. Select the column connection plate (only the plate using select switches shown below), right-click and select Hide.

Move the cut chamfers

2. Select both of the upper chamfers (using Ctrl).

3. Move the chamfers 20 mm upwards.

4. Select lower chamfers and move them 5 mm downwards.

5. Select the right side chamfers and move them 20 mm right.

6. Select the left side chamfers, move 20 mm left.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 90: Tekla Basic

Create Welds Next we will weld the end plate to the beam and the column connection plate to the column. This will also add the plates to the beam and column assemblies.

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Weld

1. Double-click the Create weld icon. Weld column plate to the beam

2. Edit the Weld properties dialog as shown below and click OK.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 91: Tekla Basic

3. Select the beam as the part to weld to (the primary part for workshop welds).

4. Select the end plate as the part to be welded (the secondary part for workshop welds).

It is very important to enter the welding order correctly. Tekla Structures uses the welding order to determine the primary and secondary parts of the assembly. This effects the position of the parts in the drawings.

You can check assemblies using command Inquire Assembly. Inquire assembly

1. Pick the beam (or any part of the assembly).

2. Right-click and select Inquire > Assembly.

The main part of the assembly will appear red and other parts will appear yellow.

To select the entire assembly: press the Alt key while clicking a part in the assembly.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 92: Tekla Basic

In case welds are not automatically placed to desired places, you can manually affect on weld location by setting the desired position for weld in the Weld properties dialog box.

By using the applied weld properties, weld the connection plate to the column. Weld connection plate to the column

Create Bolt Group Next we will create a bolt group to connect the beam to the column. We will use the bolts to bolt the beam’s end plate to the column’s connection plate.

For information on bolt group dimensions see:

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Bolts > Creating a bolt group

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon. Create bolts

2. Define bolt group properties as shown in picture below and Apply.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 93: Tekla Basic

3. Pick the column connection plate as the part to bolt to.

4. Pick the end plate as the part to be bolted.

5. Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts.

6. Pick the end plate top point as the first point (this will be the bolt group origin).

7. Pick the end plate bottom point as the second point (this will indicate the bolt group x direction).

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 94: Tekla Basic

The bolt group has now been created and the final connection looks like the figures below.

3.3 Create Cuts Interactively You can cut parts by various methods in Tekla Structures. The available cuts are:

• Line cut

• Polygon cut

• Part cut

There are numerous places in our model in which the parts are still colliding with each other, and the shape of the parts needs to be modified with the cutting tools.

We will use these cutting tools to cut the concrete slabs with the Silos (part cut) and then create a penetration for a column (polygon cut) through a hollowcore slab.

Create Part Cuts for Silos

1. Click the Create part cut icon. Create part cut

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 95: Tekla Basic

2. Pick one of the slabs as part to be cut.

3. Pick the related silo as the cutting part.

4. The slab is now cut. A blue antimatter part cut the same size as the silo appears.

In order to have clearance between the concrete slab and the silo we will now modify the size of the profile used to make the part cut.

Change part cut profile

1. Disable all of the selection switches except for the Select cuts switch. To make it easier to select the part cut.

2. Double-click the part cut.

3. The Column properties dialog box appears.

4. Uncheck all of the modify check boxes and change profile as shown in the dialog below:

5. Press Modify.

This creates a 150 mm gap all the way around between the slab and the silo.

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 96: Tekla Basic

The part cut height is still equal to the height of cutting part (= the silo). Sometimes it is more convenient to work with shorter part cuts.

By inquiring the slab (select object, right-click, select Inquire > Part) you can see that the slab bottom level is +13400 and top level +13575.

Double-click the blue part cut to open the Column properties dialog box and on the Position tab page:

Change part cut height

1. Change the bottom level to 13000 and top level to 13800.

2. Click Modify.

Now the part cut is just a little thicker than the slab, which is enough.

1. Copy it 9000 mm in the x direction to the other silo. Copy the part cut to other silo

The antimatter part will automatically adjust to the new situation and cut the other slab.

Create Slab Penetration (Polygon Cut) We will now create a penetration through a contour plate using a polygon cut.

We will create a 20 mm clearance between the penetrating column and the slab simply by picking positions to outline the polygon cut.

You should always define the polygon so that there is some tolerance between the edges of the part and the edges of the cut. If the edge of a cutting polygon is in exactly the same position as the edge of the part to be cut, it can be unclear whether the edge should be cut away.

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Polygon cut

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 27 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 97: Tekla Basic

1. In the view +3850 zoom close to the column on grid line A-4. Create polygon cut

2. Click the Create polygon cut icon.

3. Select the hollowcore slab as the part to be cut.

4. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the bottom left corner of the column to set the “From” location coordinates.

5. Type –20,-20, Press Enter, the cursor picks the point.

6. Press O (to snap to positions in orthogonal directions).

7. Move the cursor to the right to track along the ortho line.

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Creating Interactive Connections

Page 98: Tekla Basic

8. Enter 340 to specify the distance from the last point picked. Press Enter.

9. Move the cursor upwards, type 330 and press Enter.

10. Move the cursor to the left, type 340 and press Enter.

11. Click the middle button to create the polygon cut.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 29 Creating Interactive Connections

Page 99: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 23, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 100: Tekla Basic
Page 101: Tekla Basic

Contents

4 Custom Components...................................................................................................3

4.1 Define User_end_plate Custom Component .............................................................................3 4.2 Create User_end_plate Custom Component.............................................................................6 4.3 Parameterize User_end_plate Custom Connection...................................................................8 4.4 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail .............................................................................17 4.5 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail ..................................................................20

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Contents

Page 102: Tekla Basic
Page 103: Tekla Basic

4 Custom Components

This lesson introduces custom components and details. In this lesson

You will learn how to:

• Define custom components

• Use custom components

• Edit custom components to make them adaptive and parametric

4.1 Define User_end_plate Custom Component

You can build custom components either by exploding and modifying an existing component, or by creating the component objects individually as we did in Lesson 2.

You then define a custom component by picking the objects to include in the custom component, and specifying the information the user needs to input, for example, main part, secondary parts, or points they need to pick. You can then apply the custom component to similar framing conditions in the model.

We will now create a Custom component from the column-beam connection, which was interactively created in Lesson 3. By changing the connection to a Custom component you can use it in other parts of the model and in other models.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Custom Components

Page 104: Tekla Basic

Zoom in close to the component, which was interactively created between a column and a beam in Lesson 3. Make sure that all of the object types are visible in the view (welds, cuts, fittings, bolts, etc).

1. Select Detailing > Define custom component… to open the Custom component wizard dialog box.

Define Custom component

2. On the Type/Notes tab, set Type to Connection, enter a name and description (description is not mandatory) for the custom component as shown.

The Custom component types available:

• Component: A Component is 2 or more items connected together and is defined as having a main part and 1 or more secondary parts

• Detail: A Detail connects one or more items at the end of, or along the length of, a main part

Part: A Part is a component in the model such as a ladder or cell form beam

3. On the Position tab set the Position type to Box plane and click Next>.

Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > Position type

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 105: Tekla Basic

4. Use area select to select all the objects belonging to the component, click Next> on the wizard page 2/4.

Be careful that you do not select objects (e.g. parts, bolts, welds or cuts) not belonging to this component. Otherwise when you use the custom component those objects will also be created.

Tekla Structures ignores the main part, secondary parts, grids and component symbols when you are selecting objects to include in the Custom component.

5. Select the column as the main part and click Next> on wizard page 3/4.

6. Select the beam as the secondary part and click Finish on wizard page 4/4.

Tekla Structures displays a connection symbol for the new Custom component.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Custom Components

Page 106: Tekla Basic

The new custom component that you have defined is added to Custom components dialog box list.

4.2 Create User_end_plate Custom Component

We will now use the Custom component that you just defined, to create a connection at the other end of the beam.

1. Delete the End plate 144 connection from the other end of the beam. Create Custom component

2. Click the Find component icon.

3. Select the User_end_plate component from the list.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 107: Tekla Basic

4. Right-click and select Properties...

5. Review the properties and click Apply.

Help: Detailing > Custom components > Defining Custom components > Custom components basic properties

6. Pick the column as the main part and the beam as the secondary part.

The custom component is created.

We will now check how the Custom component reacts when the situation changes. Change the beam size

1. Change the beam size from IPE600 to IPE750*137, Modify.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Custom Components

Page 108: Tekla Basic

Once the custom component is created it has no intelligence or input values. In practice you can apply the custom component only in similar framing conditions to that which it was originally created.

2. Click the Undo icon to change the beam back to IPE600.

You can either create separate custom components for each different case needed in the model or you can parameterize the custom component (see the next section).

4.3 Parameterize User_end_plate Custom Connection

The User_end_plate connection is defined as a custom component but as yet has no intelligence or input values. In order to add these capabilities we have to edit the custom component.

We will not create a complete parametric custom component in this lesson, but will give you an idea how to build some simple dependencies between the component objects and the model.

We will create variables that will automatically adjust to suit a change in the beam profile and we will also input them in the finished connection interface:

• The end plate top and bottom position (which also defines the plate length)

• The distance from the 1st bolt to beam top flange

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 109: Tekla Basic

We will then create the following variables to automatically adjust to suit a change in the beam profile:

• Column plate top position

• Part cut top position

Open Custom Component Editor Since we have a custom component in the model we can open the Custom component editor.

1. Select User_end_plate component symbol. Edit custom component

2. Right-click and select Edit custom component.

The Custom component editor opens along with the Custom component editor toolbar, the Model browser and four views of the custom component.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Custom Components

Page 110: Tekla Basic

In the Custom component editor, you can create your own components and details and define their properties. You can build in dependencies between objects to make custom components parametric and have them adapt to changes in the model.

Define End Plate Top and Bottom Positions Our end plate is modeled with the beam command using plate profile PL20*230. This means the thickness (20) and the width (230) of the plate are defined by the profile. To change the thickness or the width of the plate we will need to parameterize the profile.

The length is defined by the start and end points picked for the "beam"(plate). We will now create dependencies between the end points and secondary beam top and bottom flanges.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 111: Tekla Basic

1. Select the end plate. Tie end plate top to secondary beam top

2. Select the upper handle of the end plate.

3. Right-click and select Bind to plane.

By moving the cursor around you can now highlight the available planes.

4. Highlight the plane on the secondary beam top flange, and select it by clicking the mouse.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Custom Components

Page 112: Tekla Basic

The appropriate dimension in the model will appear on the screen.

By following the same procedure tie the end plate lower handle to secondary beam bottom plane.

Tie end plate bottom to secondary beam bottom 1. Select the end plate.

2. Select the lower handle of the end plate.

3. Right-click and select Bind to plane.

4. Highlight the plane on the secondary beam bottom flange, and select it by clicking the mouse.

The appropriate dimension in the model should then appear on the screen.

Define Distance from Beam Top Flange to the First Bolt We will now add a variable to control the distance from the top of the beam to the first bolt.

To make it simpler to use the new variable, we will first remove the original offset from the bolt. This way the value added in the dialog will be the distance from the top of the beam to the first bolt.

Remove the bolt offset

1. Double-click the bolt group to open the Bolt properties dialog box.

2. Change the Start point offset Dx to 0, click Modify.

1. Select the bolt group. Tie 1st bolt to secondary beam top 2. Select the upper handle of the bolt group.

3. Right-click and select Bind to plane.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 113: Tekla Basic

4. Highlight the plane on the secondary beam top flange, and select it by clicking the mouse.

The appropriate dimension in the model appears on the screen.

1. Click the Display variables icon to see all distance and parameter variables in a component.

Display and test the variables

The Variables dialog box appears:

Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > Variables

2. Change the value of the lowest variable (the bolt distance), from 10 to 60 and press Enter.

3. To show the variables in the custom component dialog box set the variable visibility to Show.

Set the variable labels in dialog

4. Change the field names in the custom component dialog box by naming the variable labels as shown below.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Custom Components

Page 114: Tekla Basic

Tie Column Plate and Cut Part Top to Beam Top Flange Next we will tie the top of the column connection plate and the top of the part cut to the top flange of the beam.

The column end plate (as well as the part cut) was modeled as a contour plate. Unlike beam, a contour plate does not have handles that we can bind. Instead we can create distance variables from the contour plate chamfers to a plane.

Instead of binding the chamfers one by one to a plane we will create a magnetic custom plane on the top face of the contour plate. We will then bind this magnetic plane to the beam top flange. The top face of the contour plate will then move with the magnetic plane.

Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > User defined planes

1. Click the Create user-defined plane icon. Create user defined planes

2. Pick three corner points of the top of the column plate.

3. Click middle button and the plane is created.

While still in the command:

4. Pick three corners points at the top of the plate part cut.

5. Click the middle button and the plane is created.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 115: Tekla Basic

1. Double-click one of the user planes that you just created to open the Plane properties dialog.

Edit custom planes to be magnetic

2. Tick the Magnetic switch on and click Modify.

3. Select the magnetic custom plane. Bind magnetic planes to beam top 4. Right-click and select Bind to plane.

5. Pick the highlighted plane on the top of the secondary beam.

6. Repeat for the other plane.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Custom Components

Page 116: Tekla Basic

7. Close the editor by clicking the icon.

In a case where we would like to keep the existing Custom component in our model we could choose to save the custom component with a new name.

Change the beam size from IPE600 to IPE750*137, Modify. Change the beam size

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 117: Tekla Basic

In the custom component dialog change each of the variables and Modify to test their function.

Test the variables

4.4 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail

We will now create a Custom detail, which will cut a hole through a hollow-core slab.

Create a Part Cut through a Hollow-Core Slab First we will create a part cut through a hollow-core slab by using a column to define the shape of the cut.

1. Select a hollow-core slab on level +3800 between grid lines 7 and B and create a part basic view of it by right-clicking and from the pop up menu select: Create view > Part basic view.

Create cutting part

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Custom Components

Page 118: Tekla Basic

2. To create square part cut of size 380*380 mms:

• Double-click the Create concrete column icon and define column size and position.

• Close the dialog with OK.

• If necessary, restart the column command and then pick the middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab while holding Ctrl button down (this is a reference point for column position).

• Release the Ctrl button, and type r to open Enter numeric location dialog.

• Type @-1000,0,0 and press Enter to create the column 1000 mms from the edge.

Cut the hollowcore slab using part cut: Cut part

1. Pick the Create part cut icon.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 119: Tekla Basic

2. Pick the hollowcore slab.

3. Pick the column.

4. To end the command right-click and select Interrupt.

5. Remove the cutting part by picking the column and pressing the Delete button.

Define a Custom Detail Next we will create a detail type custom component.

1. Select Detailing > Define custom component… to open the Custom component wizard dialog box.

Define Custom Component

2. On the Type/Notes tab, set the Type to Detail, enter a Name and a Description (description is not mandatory) for the custom component as shown below.

3. On the Position tab, set the Position type: to Box plane and click Next >

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Custom Components

Page 120: Tekla Basic

Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > Position type

4. Select the objects (cut + hollowcore slab using the Ctrl key) and press Next >.

5. Pick the main part (hollowcore slab) and press Next >.

6. Select middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab to set the position.

7. Press Finish.

4.5 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail

The User_Hole_Creation custom detail is defined as a custom component but as yet has no intelligence or input values. In order to add these capabilities we have to edit the custom component.

We will not create a complete parametric custom component in here, but will give you an idea how to build some simple dependencies between component objects and the model.

We will create the following variables to automatically adjust to suit a change in the hole position, size and shape and we will also input them in the finished connection interface: • The hole position in X-direction

• The hole position in Y-direction

• The hole size and shape

Open Custom Component Editor 1. Select the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol. Edit custom

component 2. Right-click and select Edit custom component. A new toolbar named Custom

component editor opens along with the Model browser and 4 basic views of the custom component.

Define Parameters 1. Open variables dialog by pushing the Display variables icon. Hole size and

shape

2. Add new variable by pressing the Add button.

3. Define the Value type as Profile.

4. Set the Formula to 380*380.

5. In the Label in dialog box field enter Hole shape.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 121: Tekla Basic

6. Select Part cut from the Model browser.

7. Select Profile of the part cut.

8. Right-click Profile and select Add equation to edit the name.

9. Type Profile=P1 (variable name).

We will define the hole position by binding the part cut's reference points. Bind hole definition points

1. Select the part cut in any of the views.

2. Select the upper reference point.

3. Right-click and select Bind to plane command.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Custom Components

Page 122: Tekla Basic

4. Select Component planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu.

5. Zoom in to the detail symbol.

6. Rotate to highlight the XY plane.

7. Pick the detail's XY plane.

8. Rotate to highlight the YZ plane.

9. Pick the YZ plane.

10. Select Boundary planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu.

11. Zoom out and rotate to highlight the top boundary plane of the slab.

12. Pick the top plane.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 123: Tekla Basic

You have now bound the upper reference point in three directions. The distances are now visible in Variables dialog.

Repeat steps 3 - 12 to the part cut's lower reference point by binding it to XY and YZ directions in the Component plane and to slab bottom plane using Boundary plane.

We will next edit the hole position variables and define visibility on detail's dialog. Edit hole definition variables 1. Open the Variables dialog.

2. Edit D1 variable: Label: Distance from middle.

3. Edit D2 variable: Label: Distance from definition point.

4. Edit D3 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide.

5. Edit D4 variable: Formula: =D1, Visibility: Hide.

6. Edit D5 variable: Formula: =D2, Visibility: Hide.

7. Edit D6 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide.

8. Close editor, save changes.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Custom Components

Page 124: Tekla Basic

Check the Results We will now check that the dialog custom detail dialog has needed fields and that they function correctly.

1. Double-click the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol. A dialog opens. Modify custom detail

2. Change cut size and location, press Modify.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Custom Components

Page 125: Tekla Basic

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Custom Components

Page 126: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 30, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 127: Tekla Basic
Page 128: Tekla Basic

Contents

5 Basic Modeling 2..........................................................................................................3

5.1 Start a New Model - BasicModel2 .............................................................................................4 5.2 Setting Up Job Specific Information...........................................................................................6 5.3 Create Concrete Members ......................................................................................................10 5.4 Create Steel Members.............................................................................................................15 5.5 Combine Models 1&2 ..............................................................................................................30 5.6 Define Your Own Select Filters................................................................................................34

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Contents

Page 129: Tekla Basic
Page 130: Tekla Basic

1 Basic Modeling 2

In this lesson

In this lesson we will cover some preliminary tasks that you need to do before starting to model in a real project. We will create a new model and recap the basic functions introduced in Lesson 1. After that, you will learn some more about the basic functions.

You will learn how to:

• Set up project- information

• Define part properties and numbering series

• Work in true planes (sloped, skewed)

• Use phases

• Combine separate models

• Create your own select filters

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Basic Modeling 2

Page 131: Tekla Basic

1.1 Start a New Model - BasicModel2 Start a new model and name it BasicModel2.

Create New Model 1. Pick the New icon. Start a new model

2. Click after the path C:\TeklaStructuresModels, in the field at the bottom of the dialog box and type \BasicModel2.

3. Press the OK button and the model will be created.

Create Grid

To create the appropriate grid for BasicModel2 modify the existing default grid.

1. Double-click the grid line. Modify the existing grid

2. Edit the grid, in the Grid properties dialog box, according the grids shown above (coordinates and text).

3. Edit the grid origin Y0 value to 13900.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 132: Tekla Basic

4. Click Modify, and the new grid values will be applied.

5. Enter GRID2 in the save as field and click the Save as button to save the grid values.

1. Left-click anywhere in the view. Fit work area

2. Right-click and select Fit work area.

The view should now look like the one below.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Basic Modeling 2

Page 133: Tekla Basic

Create Plane Views along Grid Lines We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the grid lines.

1. Select the grid. Create grid views

2. Right-click and select Create view > Grid views from the pop-up menu.

3. Click the Show… button on each view plane to open the View properties dialog box, set the view properties the way you want and click OK.

4. Click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

1.2 Setting Up Job Specific Information Prior to adding any parts we will setup the model with the necessary job specific information:

• Project properties

• Preferences

• Part properties and numbering series

Project Properties Project properties are common to all drawings and can be used to fill in typical information in the title blocks.

1. Open the Project properties dialog box by selecting Properties-> Project… Set up project properties

2. Fill in the information as shown in the dialog box below.

3. Press OK.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 134: Tekla Basic

Check Preferences Before starting the modeling we will check that preferences are set up correctly.

Help: System > Using Xsteel effectively > General > Preferences

Check that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. If you change settings on the Preferences tab, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings to connections you subsequently create. Connections you created prior to changing the preferences are not affected.

1. Open Setup > Options… Check

preferences 2. On the Preferences tab check the values are as below, click OK.

Part Properties and Numbering Series You use a numbering series (numbering prefixes and start numbers) to divide parts, assemblies (steel detailing) and cast units (concrete detailing) into groups. For example, you can allocate separate numbering series to different phases or part types.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Basic Modeling 2

Page 135: Tekla Basic

You can name the numbering series to which a part, assembly or cast unit belongs, by using the part properties dialog box. The numbering series name consists of a prefix and a starting number.

If you already know in the beginning of the project how the members should be numbered it is a good idea to create the parts right from the start with the correct numbering series.

Help: Modeling > Parts > Numbering parts > Defining numbers to be used for parts

In Lesson 9 Numbering and reports, you will learn the basics of numbering parts in Tekla Structures; how numbering series result in different part / assembly /cast unit numbers, numbering settings etc. Go through each of the part properties dialog box (Beam properties, Column properties, Contour plate properties, etc.) and set them up with the information shown in the tables below and save each of them with a specific name. See the Adjust Beam properties example below the tables.

Set the part properties

Steel Members Parts/ command

Part prefix

Part start no.

Assembly prefix

Assembly start no.

Part name Material Class

Beam command

Beams PB 1 AB 1 BEAM S355JR 6

Vertical braces

PV 1 AV 1 BRACING_V S355JR 3

Horizontal braces

PH 1 AH 1 BRACING_H S355JR 3

Rafters PR 1 AR 1 RAFTER S355JR 9

Purlins PP 1 AP 1 PURLIN S355JR 8

Column command

Columns PC 1 AC 1 COLUMN S355JR 7

Silos PX 1 AX 1 SILO S355JR 1

Contour plate command

Plates 1001 A 1 PLATE S355JR 99

Concrete Members Parts/ command

Cast unit prefix

Cast unit start no.

Part name Material Class

Concrete beam command

Beams CB 1 BEAM K40-1 4

Hollowcore slabs

CH 1 HCSLAB K40-1 1

Concrete column command

Columns CC 1 COLUMN K40-1 3

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 136: Tekla Basic

Pad footing command

Pad footings CP 1 FOOTING K40-1 2

Concrete slab command

Slabs CS 1 SLAB K40-1 4 1. Open the Beam properties dialog. Example: Adjust

beam properties 2. Match the highlighted fields in the dialog box below.

Type the part name BEAM in the save as field and click the Save as button.

Save Defaults After you have setup the properties, you must save the Project properties and Preferences for this model with the Save defaults command.

The Save defaults command creates a set of standard files which also include the part properties files. These standard properties are loaded when you open the model.

In other words, when you want specific properties to be loaded by default when you open a model, setup and load the properties before using the Save defaults command.

Help: System > Files and Folders > Customizing Xsteel > Save defaults

Click Setup > Save defaults. Save Defaults

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Basic Modeling 2

Page 137: Tekla Basic

1.3 Create Concrete Members First we will create pad footings, columns, and beams on grid line 1 and then copy them all at once to the other grid lines.

We will then create a slab on top of the columns/beams at level 7175.

Pre Cast Footings We will now create foundations on grid line 1.

1. Double-click the Create pad footing icon. 2700*2700 footing

2. Load the saved FOOTING properties.

3. Enter the Pad footing information in the dialog box for a 2700*2700 footing as shown in the drawing (set the profile to 2700*2700, Bottom level to –650 and Top level to 0).

4. Click Apply.

5. Pick grid intersections C-1 and F-1.

While still in the command: 2100*2100 footing

6. Enter the Pad footing information in the dialog box for a 2100*2100 footing (set the profile to 2700*2700, Bottom level to –650 and Top level to 0).

7. Click Apply.

8. Pick grid intersections D-1 and E-1.

The footings should now look like those shown below:

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 138: Tekla Basic

Pre Cast Columns Now we will create the columns on grid line 1.

1. Double-click on the Create Concrete column icon. 900*600 Columns

2. Load the COLUMN properties that you saved earlier.

3. According to the drawing shown above, enter the information in the Concrete column properties dialog box for a 900*600 column, and click Apply.

4. Pick the intersections of grids C-1 and then F-1.While still in the command:

Complete the dialog for 600*600 columns and create them on grid intersections D-1 and E-1. 600*600 Columns

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Basic Modeling 2

Page 139: Tekla Basic

Pre Cast Beams We will now create the beams on grid line 1 at level +7175.

1. Double-click the Create concrete beam icon. Create beams

2. Load the BEAM properties that you’ve saved.

3. Enter the information in the Concrete beam properties dialog according the drawing above, click Apply.

4. In the GRID 1 view pick the intersection of gridlines C-7175 and then D-7175.

5. End the command by clicking the middle button.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 140: Tekla Basic

6. While on grid line 1, create the other two beams the same way.

Copy the Members We will now copy the footings, column and beams that we created to grid lines 2-7.

1. Select the footings, columns and beams. Copy the members

2. Right-click and select Copy > Translate… from the pop-up menu.

3. Pick two points to show the translation vector (6000 in X direction).

4. Type in the number of copies (6).

5. Click Copy.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Basic Modeling 2

Page 141: Tekla Basic

Insitu Slab We will now create a 350 mm slab on top of the framework by using the outermost corners of the columns.

1. Double-click the Create concrete slab icon. Create the slab

2. Load the SLAB properties that you saved earlier.

3. Complete the Concrete slab properties dialogue box as shown and Apply this.

4. In the PLAN +7175 view pick the outermost corners of the four columns as shown.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 142: Tekla Basic

5. Click middle button to create the slab.

1.4 Create Steel Members First, we will create two columns on grid line 1 and then a rafter between them.

After that we will create the construction points needed to create the horizontal bracing and purlins. We will copy translate the completed portal frame and points. By taking advantage of sloping work plane and view planes we will model the horizontal bracing and purlins.

Finally we will create vertical bracing on grid lines C and F.

Steel Columns We first create two columns on grid line 1.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Basic Modeling 2

Page 143: Tekla Basic

1. Double-click the Create column icon. Create columns

2. Load the COLUMN properties.

3. Complete the Column properties (profile and the levels) for the column at the grid intersection C-1 as shown in the figure above and click Apply.

4. Pick the grid intersection C-1 to create the column.

5. Complete the Column properties for the column at grid intersection F-1, and click Apply.

6. Pick the grid intersection F-1 to create the second column.

Since the profile depth of the concrete and steel columns are different (900*600 => h=900 while HEA 800 => h=790) middle positioning results a gap in the outer face.

Use the Measure tool to measure the distance from the edge of the column to the edge of the slab.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 144: Tekla Basic

1. Click the Create x measure icon. Measure the gap

2. In the grid 1 view pick the point in the slab corner then the point in the column corner.

3. Pick a position to place the dimension.

Adjust the column edge to the slab (and concrete column) by using the vertical position offset in the Column properties dialog.

Adjust the vertical position

1. Open Column properties dialog box.

2. Modify the column on grid line F using a vertical offset of 55.

3. Modify the column on grid line C using a vertical offset of -55.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Basic Modeling 2

Page 145: Tekla Basic

Steel Rafter Now we will create a rafter between the 2 columns that we just created.

1. Double-click the Create beam icon. Create rafter

2. Load the RAFTER properties.

3. Enter the rafter information in the dialog according the drawing above (Profile: IPE750*160) and click Apply.

4. In the GRID 1 view pick the intersection of grids C-20200 and then F-18200.

Work Points for Horizontal Bracing and Purlins After inputting the two columns and the rafter, we will layout points for modeling the purlins, vertical and horizontal braces.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 146: Tekla Basic

Bracing Work Points We need first to create points at the intersection of grid C and rafter centerline and intersection of grid F and rafter centerline. Then using the points we will create work points for the braces.

To create a point at the intersection (shown with red arrow) of grid C and rafter centerline:

1. Double-click Create divided line points command. Intersection of grid and rafter centerline

2. Type in 1 (1points) and pick the positions shown below.

To create the point in the intersection of grid F and rafter centerline on the other end of the rafter we simply copy the first point.

Copy the point to the other side

1. Select the point just created, right-click and select Copy – Translate…

2. Pick the start point of the rafter then the end point of the rafter, click Copy.

We will now create the work points for first and last brace.

1. Double-click Create extension point icon. First and last brace work points

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Basic Modeling 2

Page 147: Tekla Basic

2. Type in –800, click OK.

3. Pick from one of the points just created then the other.

4. Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order

Using the Create divided line points command divide the space between the work points that you just created into ten equal spaces (9 points).

1. Double-click the Create divided line points icon. Divide the working points in ten segments

2. Enter 9 as the number of dividing points, click OK.

3. Pick from one of the work points that you just created and then the other.

Purlins Work Points We can now use the grid intersections C-20200 and F-18200 to create the work points for first and last purlins.

1. Double-click Create extension point icon. First and last purlins work points

2. Type in –600, click OK.

3. Pick the grid intersections C-20200 and then F-18200.

4. Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 148: Tekla Basic

Using the Create divided line points command divide the space between the work points that you just created into 12 equal spaces (11 points).

Divide the working points in 12 segments

Copy the Portal Frame and the Points We will now copy the columns, rafter and the points to grid lines 2-7.

1. Select the columns, rafter and points. Copy the members

2. Copy > Translate…

3. Pick two points to show the translation vector (6000 in X direction).

4. Type in the number of copies (6).

5. Click Copy.

Set Sloping Work Plane for Bracing and Purlins The next step is to model the horizontal bracing and purlins at the sloped roof. To place the parts in the correct plane we will first change the work plane (which currently is the local coordinate system of the model) to the roof slope.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Basic Modeling 2

Page 149: Tekla Basic

Help: Modeling > Getting Started > Basics > Defining the work area and shifting the work plane

Help: Modeling > Getting Started > View reference > View > Work plane > To part plane

To set the work plane to the roof slope: Set work plane to the roof slope

1. Pick the Set Work plane to part top icon.

2. Pick the rafter on grid line 1.

The work plane is now positioned in a plane parallel to the top plane of rafter.

The Set work plane to part plane command sets the work plane parallel to the part plane (front top, back, bottom) on the center line of the part.

You can use the command, Work plane > With one point, to set the work plane exactly to the desired position. This command keeps the work plane parallel to the current work plane, but moves it to a new position using a single picked point.

True Plan View To make it easier to add the roof bracing we will now make a true plan view on the roof bracing by creating a view perpendicular to the work plane. We can also use the true plan view in drawings.

Working in a true plan view makes it easier to model E.g. sloped objects since the grids are also shown in the true plan and points in the view plane are represented as yellow crosses.

The part positioning, copying etc however always comply with the work plane coordinate system no matter in which view you perform the commands.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 150: Tekla Basic

1. Pick Properties > View... Create true plan view

2. Complete the properties as shown below, click OK.

3. Select View > Create view > To workplane.

The new view is created. The work points created for braces appear in yellow since they are now on the view plane. The grid is also shown in the true plan view plane.

Create Horizontal Bracing Working in the true plan view we will next create the horizontal bracing members using the Create beam tool.

1. Double-click the Create beam icon. Create horizontal bracing

2. Load the BRACING_H properties.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Basic Modeling 2

Page 151: Tekla Basic

Complete the dialog box according to the information shown in the drawing above and change the Position at depth to: Middle and Apply.

3. In the true plan view create the braces shown in the drawing by snapping to the yellow points.

Check the position of the braces in the 3d view and elevation view on grid 1. Check the positioning

We will now copy mirror the braces to the other end of the building (between gridlines 4 and 5). Since the work plane is now at the same slope with the TRUE PLAN view, it is easy to pick the points for the mirror line.

The Copy > Mirror command copies and mirrors objects through a plane that is perpendicular to the work plane and passes through a line you specify.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 152: Tekla Basic

1. Select the braces. Mirror the braces

2. Copy > Mirror.

3. In the True plan view pick two points on gridline 4 to set the mirror line and click Copy.

Create Purlins While still working in the true plan view we will create the purlins by using the Create beam tool.

1. Double-click the Create beam icon. Create purlins

2. Load the PURLIN properties.

3. Select a Z300/3.0 profile for the purlin.

4. Change the Position / At depth to: Front and Apply.

5. Pick the purlin work point near grid intersection F-1 at the command Pick first position.

The point that you pick for the purlin is red since it is not on the view plane.

6. At the command: Pick second point, pick the work point near grid intersection F-2.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Basic Modeling 2

Page 153: Tekla Basic

7. Check the elevation view on grid 1 to ensure that the purlin is orientated and positioned correctly.

With asymmetric profiles (Z,L etc) the picking order of first and second position determines the orientation. It is not possible to change the orientation using the beam properties.

8. Create the rest of the purlins by using the Copy > Translate command.

Now we must switch the work plane back to global origin to carry on modeling outside of the roof plane.

Set the work plane back to global origin

1. Pick View > Work plane > Work plane…

2. Select Plane: XY set the depth coordinate to 0 and click Change.

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 154: Tekla Basic

The work plane is now set back to the global origin.

Vertical Bracing Working in the elevation on grid C view we will create vertical bracing using the Create beam tool.

1. Double-click the Create beam icon. Create brace

2. Load the BRACING_V properties.

3. Enter RHS200*120*8 as the profile.

4. Change the Position / At depth to: Front and add a 5 mm offset, click Apply.

5. Create one brace using the column top positions at C-1 and C-2.

6. Move the brace 1300 mm downwards and to the middle of the column.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 27 Basic Modeling 2

Page 155: Tekla Basic

1. Select the brace and use Copy > Translate… to copy the brace five times at 6000 mm along grid line C.

Copy the brace along grid C

2. Select all the braces on grid line C and select Copy > Translate… Copy the braces to grid line F

3. In the grid 1 view, pick the outer corner of the column on grid line C as the first position.

4. Pick the inner corner of the column on grid line F as the second position, click Copy.

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 156: Tekla Basic

Crane Girders Next we will add crane girders to the framing.

1. Double-click the Create beam icon. Create girder

2. Load the BEAM properties.

3. Enter IPE450 for the profile size.

4. In the GRID 1 view pick the grid intersection C-15500.

5. Use the cursor to snap (Do not pick!!) in the Y direction.

6. With the keyboard type 930 for the numeric location and press Enter.

1. Copy the girder that you created to other columns on grid line C. Copy girders

2. Use the Copy – mirror command to copy the girders from grid line C to gridline F.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 29 Basic Modeling 2

Page 157: Tekla Basic

The BasicModel2 model is now complete.

Save the model. Save the model

1. Click File > Save as… Save the model with a new name

2. Click after the path C:\TeklaStructuresModels, in the field at the bottom of the dialog box and type \BasicModelCombined.

3. Press the OK button. The model has now been saved with the new name.

1.5 Combine Models 1&2 Next we will combine BasicModel1 and BasicModelCombined by copying the objects in phase 1 from BasicModel1. To copy the objects from another model we will use the command; Copy from model. This command copies objects from specified phase(s) from another model.

To be able to manage the objects from the two models after we have combined them we will first transfer the model 2 parts a different phase.

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings > Phases

Change the Phase of BasicModel2 Members, Preparation 1. Click Properties > Phase number... to open the Phase manager dialog box. Check objects by

phases By default only Phase 1 appears in the dialog box.

2. Select Phase 1.

3. Click Objects by phases.

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 158: Tekla Basic

All the parts in the model will become highlighted, indicating they belong to Phase 1.

4. Click Add button to add a new phase. Add a new phase – Model2

5. Edit the name of the new phase to Model 2.

6. Also edit the name of the Phase 1 to Model 1.

7. See that all of the parts are still highlighted in the Model 2 phase.

8. Click Modify phase.

9. Now all of the parts in the model have changed to Phase number 2.

In the BasicModel1 the column footings on gridline B were dimensioned both for steel columns on gridline B and concrete columns on gridline C. After combining the models the footings on gridline C will no longer be needed and you can delete them.

Delete the pad footings from grid line C. Remove the pad footing

Edit > Copy from Model Since we did not edit the phases in BasicModel1 they all belong to phase number 1.

1. Click Edit > Copy > From model... Copy from model

2. Select the BasicModel1 as the model to copy from in the Model directories list.

3. Enter 1 as the phase number from which to copy the objects.

4. Click Copy.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 31 Basic Modeling 2

Page 159: Tekla Basic

The model 1 parts will now in the combined model.

With the Copy > From model command you are not able to import drawings with the model.

Change the Model 1 Part Properties and Numbering Series The Model 1 parts were created without paying attention to part properties and they are not consistent with the Model 2 parts (color, name, numbering series, and material).

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 160: Tekla Basic

The different numbering series and material would result otherwise equal parts getting different numbers when numbering.

In this combined model we want all of the parts to be numbered according to the numbering series shown in the table in the beginning of the lesson. To achieve this we will need to modify the Model 1 part properties so that they are consistent with the Model 2 parts.

The properties of the connection parts to be created in the new model will be consistent with the existing ones since we used same default Preferences in both models.

1. Select the Model 1 pad footings. Change Pad footing properties

You can try the available select filters for selecting the footings.

2. Load the FOOTING properties.

3. Remove the modify switches and check only Name, Material, Class and Numbering series switches.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 33 Basic Modeling 2

Page 161: Tekla Basic

4. Click Modify.

By following the procedure above change the properties for: Change other parts properties

• Beams

• Concrete beams

• Columns

• Concrete columns

• Slabs

• Hollowcore slabs

• Horizontal bracing

• Vertical Bracing

• Silos

1.6 Define Your Own Select Filters To make the selecting of parts easier in the future we will now define select filters for each part type. We will use the name of the part as the filtering criteria.

For steel/concrete beams and columns we will add also the material as the filtering criteria to be able to filter them separately.

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Filter > Select filter

1. Click the Display select filter dialog icon to open the Select filter dialog box. Define select filter for footing

2. Load the standard filter to turn out all the possible filtering.

3. Enter name FOOTING in the Name field of Parts tab.

4. Enter name FOOTING in the Save as field and click Save as.

You can now choose the new filter from the drop down list.

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 162: Tekla Basic

By following the procedure above define select filters for:

• Slabs

• Hollowcore slabs

• Horizontal bracing

• Vertical Bracing

• Silos

• Rafters

• Purlins

To define select filters for plates created both manually and by the connections: Define Select filter for plates

1. Enter name *PLATE* in the Name field of Parts tab.

(*PLATE* matches all parts of which name includes word PLATE)

2. Enter name PLATE in the Save as field and click Save as

To define select filters for Steel Beams: Define Select filter for steel beams

3. Enter the name BEAM in the Name field of Parts tab.

4. Enter S* in the Material field of Parts tab.

(S* matches all materials with a material name that begins with the characters S)

5. Enter name BEAM_STEEL in the Save as field and click Save as.

By following the procedure above define select filters for:

• Concrete beams

• Steel columns

• Concrete columns

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 35 Basic Modeling 2

Page 163: Tekla Basic

Create your own select filters to use both when modeling and using wizards to automate drawing creation.

Copy from model command only copies the objects from another model (not e.g. attributes from the model folder). We will now bring the attributes created in Basicmodel 1 to BasicModelCombined.

1. Tools > Open model folder. Bring the BasicModel1 attributes 2. Browse to model BasicModel1 > Attributes.

3. Copy the files.

4. Browse to BasicModelCombined > Attributes.

5. Paste.

Finally save the model. Save the model

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Basic Modeling 2

Page 164: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 23, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 165: Tekla Basic
Page 166: Tekla Basic

Contents

6 Catalog ..........................................................................................................................3

6.1 Modify Profile Catalog – Add a New Profile ...............................................................................3 6.2 Use the New Library Profile – Add Footing Beams to Model ...................................................15 6.3 Modify Material Catalog – Add a New Material........................................................................20

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Contents

Page 167: Tekla Basic
Page 168: Tekla Basic

6 Catalog

This lesson explains how to view and modify the catalogs. You will learn how to create a new profile cross section and how to define a rule group for it. You will also learn how to add a parametric profile to the profile catalog and how to add user-defined information in existing catalogs. After the profile catalog has been updated, the new profile will then be used for modeling.

In this lesson

In this lesson you will also learn how to add a new material type and a new grade to the material catalog.

Catalogs are databases containing detailed information about profiles, materials and bolts, which are available for use in your project. For example, the bolt catalog contains a library of standard bolts and bolt assemblies used in structural steelwork. Catalogs can also contain project or company-specific information. Catalogs can also be imported and exported.

Introduction

See more in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > Things you should know about catalogs.

See more for profile import and export in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > The profile catalog > Merging profile catalogs.

See more about material catalogs in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > The material catalog.

6.1 Modify Profile Catalog – Add a New Profile In this exercise we will define a new cross section and profile using Tekla Structures Profile cross section from plate (S10) macro, which provides you with the ability to create user defined cross sections and user-defined profiles automatically from a contour plate. The macro adds the profile and the cross section to profile catalog. We will first create a contour plate to define the shape of the new cross section, and then we will use the new profile in our model.

Define the Cross Section Shape You can create the contour plate in any Plane angle view. See more about views in Tekla Structures Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views > View properties.

Create a contour plate

First we will create a polygon by picking corner points according to the dimensions shown below. For now, we will just pick the points which describe the outline of the profile, later we will modify those corners which need to have a radius.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Catalog

Page 169: Tekla Basic

Before starting to create the polygon, check that you have Snap to any position on, in Snap settings toolbar. Also set ortho to on by pressing the letter O.

1. Pick the Create contour plate icon.

2. Pick any starting point for the polygon.

3. Move the cursor in the desired direction for a second point.

4. On the keyboard, enter a distance. Tekla Structures will automatically open the Enter a numeric location dialog.

5. Press Enter. Tekla Structures creates a new point at the given location.

6. Repeat for each corner point for the whole polygon outline.

7. Close the polygon by clicking the middle button.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 170: Tekla Basic

We will next complete the cross section shape by modifying the contour plate inner corners, which require a radius. First zoom in to one of the contour plate corners, which need a radius.

Add rounding to the contour plate corners

1. Pick the contour plate chamfer. See more about chamfers in Tekla Structures Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Chamfer.

2. Double-click the chamfer to open the dialog and then select the round chamfer type from pull-down list.

3. Enter a value for the radius and press Modify. Tekla Structures rounds the selected chamfer.

4. Leave the dialog open and select the other chamfers, which need to be rounded and press Modify.

The contour plate can have rounded chamfers, holes, part adds or cuts. They are transferred to the cross section and further to the profile using Tekla Structures Profile cross section from plate (S10) macro.

Create the Profile When the contour plate shape has been completed, you are ready to add your own cross section and profile to profile catalog using Tekla Structures Profile cross section from plate (S10) macro.

Add a new profile to catalog

It is important that your work plane is parallel to the plate. E.g. if you create the plate in the x-y plane (i.e. on the ground) then ensure that your work plane is in the same plane (i.e. in the 3d view).

See more about work plane in Tekla Structures Help: Modeling > Getting started > View reference >View > Workplane > Work plane...

1. Open Profile cross-section from plate (10) dialog box by double-clicking the icon on connections toolbar.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Catalog

Page 171: Tekla Basic

On the Parameters tab page we will enter a name for the profile cross section and the profile (blank spaces are NOT allowed in name). We must also decide where the new profile will be saved.

Define profile parameters

2. Enter Section name (be sure that the name is not already in use; Tekla Structures will overwrite the existing name).

3. Enter Profile name (note that section and profile can have same name).

4. Select the directory, where the profile catalog will be saved. See more about folders in Tekla Structures System > Files and folders > Folders.

5. Enter the profile's weight / m³.

Next we will define the profile's type and main dimensions. See more in Tekla Structures System > Catalogs > The profile catalog.

Define profile attributes

6. Select the Profile attributes tab page.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 172: Tekla Basic

7. Select the profile type from the pull-down list.

8. Enter the profile's main dimensions.

After you have entered all of the necessary information in the dialog, you can add the profile to the profile catalog.

Create profile

9. Press Apply. Tekla Structures prompts you to pick the object, pick the contour plate.

After you have picked the plate, Tekla Structures generates a new profile cross section and adds the profile to the profile catalog. Tekla Structures also creates a sample profile on top of the contour plate.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Catalog

Page 173: Tekla Basic

Check the Results Once the profile has been created, the next step is to see that the result is correct. We will first open the profile properties dialog and check its content. Then we'll check the profile catalog.

1. Double-click the new profile. Tekla Structures opens a Beam properties dialog. Check profile properties

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 174: Tekla Basic

2. Check that Profile field has the correct profile name.

3. Close the Beam properties dialog.

1. Select Catalog > Profiles > Modify… from the File pull-down menu to access the Tekla Structures Profile catalog. See more information about profile catalog in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > The profile catalog.

Check profile catalog

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Catalog

Page 175: Tekla Basic

2. Find the new profile under User defined, fixed rule group. Tekla Structures places user defined profiles automatically under this rule.

3. Check the profile dimensions and general information on the General tab page. See that the cross section name in the Profile subtype field is the same as you defined in the macro dialog. Also check that the Equivalent type, which was defined in the Type field in the macro dialog, is correct.

4. Pick the Analysis tab page. Tekla Structures has automatically calculated the cross section area and unit weight for the new profile. Check that they are correct.

5. Press the OK button to save the profile and close the dialog.

Use the Profile in Model Once the profile has been created we can immediately use it in our model. Complete the settings in beam properties dialog and start creating the crane beams.

Define beam settings

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 176: Tekla Basic

1. Double-click the Create beam icon and complete the beam properties as described below.

2. Select MY_I_PROFILE from Select profile list dialog under Library profile category > User defined, fixed rule set.

3. Press OK on both dialogs.

When the beam settings are ready we can begin to create the crane beams. First we will create one beam and check that the shape and position are correct.

Create the cranes

1. Zoom in to intersection of grid lines F and 1 on top of the IPE450 supporting beam.

2. Create one crane beam between lines 1 and 4. Start at the outer edge of the supporting beam on line 1, end at the middle of the supporting beam on line 4.

3. Select the crane beam and copy it between the grid lines 4 and 7.

4. Select both crane beams and copy them to the other side of the building on grid line C.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Catalog

Page 177: Tekla Basic

We now have crane beams on both sides of the building.

Add a Rule to Profile Catalog

Next we will add a rule for the new profile in the profile catalog. Profiles are grouped according to rules such as profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type (e.g. HEA). See more about rules in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > The profile catalog > Working with rules.

1. Right-click on the profile tree dialog (File -> Catalog -> Profiles -> Modify…), click Add rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog box.

Add a rule

2. Type in the Rule name My properties.

3. Choose the Profile type to which the rule will be applied.

4. Enter the Name filter string that will define the new rule. Tekla Structures groups the catalog entries that satisfy your criteria under a new rule. In this case, to group all MY_PROFILES enter *MY* in the name filter field. See more about filters in Tekla Structures System > Catalogs > Things you should know > The filter.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 178: Tekla Basic

As a default the wildcard symbol (*) is entered, meaning "all entries". To group all catalog entries with names beginning with A, enter A* as the Name filter string. To group all catalog entries with names containing 100, enter *100*. The characters * and ? can also be used in object names. If the object name you want to filter contains * or ?, enclose * or ? in square brackets. E.g., to find the profile P100*10, enter P100[*]10 in the filter field.

5. Press OK to save the rule and close the dialog.

Add User-Defined Information to Profile We will next add the profile manufacturer information into the profile catalog by way of user-defined attributes. For that you need to re-open the profile catalog. See more in Tekla Structures System > Catalogs > The profile catalog > Adding user defined attributes to a profile.

Select the User attributes tab page in the Modify profile catalog dialog. Create a new user attribute

1. Press the Definitions… button. Tekla Structures opens a Modify profile properties dialog box.

2. Press Add. Tekla Structures creates a new user defined attribute.

3. Select User defined, fixed profile type from pull-down list.

4. Check that Quantity type is set to String.

5. Under Property name enter a unique name (e.g. MANUFACTURER) for the new attribute. Blank spaces are NOT allowed in the name.

6. Enter a name (e.g. Manufacturer) for the attribute under Label. This text will be displayed in the dialog.

7. Press Update. Tekla Structures updates the attribute values.

8. Press OK to save the information. When re-opening the Modify profile properties dialog, the new attribute appears under User defined, fixed -type profiles.

1. Select MY_I_PROFILE from profile catalog. Enter value for the attribute

2. Insert a manufacturer name (e.g. My workshop) into Value field on the User attributes tab.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Catalog

Page 179: Tekla Basic

3. Press Update to enter the information to selected profile.

4. Press OK to save the information and close the dialog.

Add a Library Profile – Parametric Profiles We will next add a standard (fixed) profile to the profile catalog using a pre-defined parametric profile. This makes it faster and easier to select the necessary profile when adding it to the model; otherwise we would have to define the dimensions for the parametric profile in the beam properties dialog.

See more information about profile catalog in Tekla Structures System > Catalogs > The profile catalog.

Add profile

1. Select Catalog > Profiles > Modify… from the File pull-down menu.

2. Right- in the tree structure and click Add profile. A new profile will be created with the name PROFILE (number).

3. Change the profile name to MY_FOOTING_BEAM1. The profile name must be uppercase, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lowercase text to uppercase in this field.

Set profile properties

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 180: Tekla Basic

4. Choose the Profile type, User defined, parametric from pull-down list and the Profile subtype StdLib.SK.

5. Enter dimensions for the profile. These dimensions will be fixed on the part properties dialogs, and can be changed only in the Modify profile catalog dialog.

6. Press Update to insert the values to the profile.

7. Press OK to save the values.

6.2 Use the New Library Profile – Add Footing Beams to Model

We will next use the new library profile to model footing beams.

Define Beam Properties We will first set the beam properties, find the correct profile and set the correct position.

1. Double-click Create concrete beam icon to open the properties dialog. Select the profile

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Catalog

Page 181: Tekla Basic

2. Select the new profile by pushing … (Browse) button. Tekla Structures opens the Select profile dialog.

3. Select Library profile for profile category.

4. Select MY_FOOTING_BEAM1. The dimensions are fixed and can only be changed in the Modify profile catalog dialog.

5. Press OK to accept the profile and to close the dialog. MY_FOOTING_BEAM1 appears in Shape field in the Concrete beam properties dialog.

6. Select the Position tab page and set the position as shown below. Set the position

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 182: Tekla Basic

7. Press OK in Concrete beam properties dialog to accept the beam settings and to close the dialog.

Create Footing Beams When the beam settings have been completed you can start creating the footing beams. Create first one beam and check that the shape and position are correct.

1. Pick the starting point for footing beam on plane view +0.00 at the outer corner of column.

Create footing beams

2. Pick the end point for the footing beam on plane view +0.00 at the intersection of the grid line and the column outer plane.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Catalog

Page 183: Tekla Basic

3. Complete by clicking the middle button.

4. Check the position by creating part views. Pick the footing beam, right-click and select, Create view > Part basic views…

5. Select the Create concrete beam icon again and create the next footing beam. Make the start point at the end point of previous beam and the end point at the next grid line. Repeat for the next beam. You should now have 3 footing beams at grid line 7.

6. Skip the corner and continue creating footing beams between grid lines 6 and 4.

Create Polybeam We will now create a footing beam to wrap around the corner using the polybeam function.

See more about polybeams in Tekla Structures Help: Modeling> Parts > Steel part commands > Polybeam.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 184: Tekla Basic

First point Second point

Third point

1. Select Create concrete beam icon again and pick the starting point at the end point of beam between grid lines E and F.

Create footing polybeam

2. Then pick to the column outer corner.

3. Make the third pick at grid line 6.

4. Complete the polybeam by clicking the middle button.

Complete Footing Beams 1. Continue by creating the footing beams on grid line 3. Create the

remaining footing beams 2. Create another footing polybeam at the corner.

3. Create the last two footing beams between grid lines E and C.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Catalog

Page 185: Tekla Basic

6.3 Modify Material Catalog – Add a New Material We will next add a new material called Neoprene to the catalog. Neoprene will be used later on concrete consoles.

See more about material catalog in Tekla Structures System > Catalogs > The material catalog.

Add a New Material Type We will first create a new material type under which the new material will be created.

Select File > Catalog > Materials > Modify… from File pull-down menu to open the Modify material catalog dialog.

Open the material catalog

If the material type you need is missing from the tree, you can create a new one. Create a new material type

1. Right-click on a material branch in the tree and select Add miscellaneous branch.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 186: Tekla Basic

Add a New Material We will next add a zero-weight material under the miscellaneous branch and use it for silos in the model.

2. Right-click on Miscellaneous branch in the tree and select Add grade. Create a new material grade

3. Type Zero_weight for the material name in the tree.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Catalog

Page 187: Tekla Basic

4. Add the material's density 0.00 for profiles and plates.

5. Save the new material type and grade by pressing OK.

We will next use the new zero-weight material for the silos in order to exclude the silos out from the total weight of the model.

Select the two silos in the model and double-click on one of them while holding the Shift button down to open the properties dialog.

Change material of the silos

1. Select Zero_weight material from Select material list.

2. Close Select material dialog by clicking OK.

3. Push Modify button in the Column properties dialog to change the material of the silos.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Catalog

Page 188: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 26, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 189: Tekla Basic
Page 190: Tekla Basic

Contents

11 Assembly and Single Part Drawings ......................................................................... 3

11.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model............................................................................3 11.2 Create Drawings Using Drawing Wizards..................................................................................4 11.3 Edit Drawing Properties ...........................................................................................................11 11.4 Create New Drawing Wizard ...................................................................................................21 11.5 Create Drawings Manually.......................................................................................................28 11.6 Edit Drawings Manually ...........................................................................................................29 11.7 Updating Assembly and Single-part Drawings.........................................................................32 11.8 Cloning Drawings ....................................................................................................................36

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 191: Tekla Basic
Page 192: Tekla Basic

11 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

We will introduce the creation of assembly and single-part drawings in Tekla Structures.

In this lesson

We will first create single-part and assembly drawings by using predefined drawing wizards (drawing wizards are an automatic way of creating single, assembly and multi-drawings).

We will then edit the drawing properties and create a new drawing wizard. The Drawing Wizard will use the edited drawing properties and the select filters that we defined in an earlier lesson. Then we will show how the same drawings can be created manually. We will also demonstrate how updating effects the drawings.

Revision control of all drawing types is presented in Lesson 10 Principles of working with drawings.

11.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model

Assembly and Single-Part Drawings Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of each of the individual steel parts in the model. Assembly drawings are workshop drawings, in which details of an assembly consisting of the steel parts are presented for fabrication.

All of the views in single-part or assembly drawings are current views of the members as they are in the model.

When the model contains any identical members, the drawing is a view of one of these members. The drawing, however, contains information about the quantity of all of the identical members. If the "host" member of the drawing is modified or deleted, it will get a new position mark at the next numbering. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign the original drawing to another member with the original position mark.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 193: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, for example, dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. Because the information in the drawings and reports comes directly from the model, you cannot delete any of the parts or bolts from the drawings. You are able to filter out parts and bolts in the drawings, or make them invisible.

You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the related drawings when you next carry out numbering.

For more information, see Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Basics.

11.2 Create Drawings Using Drawing Wizards

Once you have numbered the model, you can create assembly and single-part drawings from the model. Drawing wizards are the most effective way to create drawings in Tekla Structures.

Wizards automatically produce different types of drawings of different parts, such as beams, columns, and braces. You can use wizards to create single-part, assembly, or multi-drawings using the settings defined in the wizard files.

You can use the predefined wizard files, edit them, or create your own drawing wizards. The Wizard dialog box lists the available wizard files.

For more information on drawing wizards, see: Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Using drawing wizards

Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawings reference > File > Wizard…

Drawing wizards cannot be used to create cast unit (CU) drawings of concrete structures.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 194: Tekla Basic

Functionality of Drawing Wizards For each member type in the model, drawing wizards automatically perform the following steps: 1. Define the drawing type to be created (single, assembly or multi).

2. Define the drawing properties to be used.

3. With the given select filter, select the parts from which to create drawings.

4. Create drawings.

When you apply a wizard, you can choose whether the wizard creates drawings from all parts of the model, or just from the selected parts.

By creating wizards that match the select filters and drawing properties in the project you can automatically create all single and assembly drawings of the parts using the correct predefined properties.

Preconditions of using a drawing wizard:

• Numbering of the model must be up to date.

• The appropriate wizard file must exist.

• The saved drawing properties listed in the wizard file must exist.

• The saved select filters listed in the wizard file must exist.

Model members which will be selected by the select filter must exist.

Create Single-Part Drawings of Selected Parts We will now use a drawing wizard to create single-part drawings of selected steel beams and plates. 1. Open the BasicModelCombined. Create single-part

drawings of steel beams 2. Select the BEAM_STEEL from the drop down list of available Select filters.

3. Select the whole model with an area selection.

4. To view the creation of the drawings, open the drawing list by clicking the Open drawing list icon.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 195: Tekla Basic

5. Select File > Wizard… from the menu or click the Wizard icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Wizard dialog box.

6. Select Single Drawings on the Wizards tab.

7. Click the Create from selected button.

8. In the drawing list check that the single-part drawings with the title BEAM were created.

9. Open a few single-part drawings for viewing.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 196: Tekla Basic

Following the procedure above, now create the single part drawings of the plates. Create single-part drawings from plates 1. Select the PLATE select filter.

2. Select the whole model with an area selection.

3. Select Single Drawings on the Wizards tab in the wizard dialog box.

4. Click the Create from selected button.

5. In the drawings list check that the single-part drawings with the title PLATE were created.

6. Open a few single-part drawings for viewing.

Using the procedure outlined above, you could create single-part drawings from any other selected steel parts in the model (columns, braces, angles, etc.).

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 197: Tekla Basic

It is advisable to create all the single and assembly drawings with the wizard, even for a single part.

Tekla Structures displayes a Cancel dialog box during the creation drawings. Click OK in the dialog box to stop creating the drawings.

To create single-part drawings from all of the steel parts at once you can use the option Create from all.

Create Assembly Drawings of All Parts Next we will create assembly drawings of all of the parts by using another drawing wizard.

To create all of the assembly drawings: 1. Click the Wizard icon to open the Wizard dialog box. Create assembly

drawings

2. Select Assembly Drawings on the Wizards tab.

3. Click the Create from all button.

Use the Create from all button to create drawings from the whole model at once. Note that Tekla Structures will not create single-part drawings or assembly drawings from concrete parts.

4. In the drawings list check that the assembly drawings were created correctly (sort the

drawing list by Title).

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 198: Tekla Basic

5. Open a few assembly drawings (which are not named STANDARD) for viewing.

For parts that don't match with the drawing properties or filters listed in the wizard file, the predefine wizards creates drawings using STANDARD properties.

1. Select drawings with the title STANDARD in the drawing list. Select parts with

drawing title STANDARD 2. Click the Filter - Select parts button.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 199: Tekla Basic

The parts associated with the selected drawing are now highlighted in the model. You will find that e.g. that objects like braces are highlighted in the model (the default wizard does not have a request for bracing). 1. Select one vertical brace on gridline A. Open brace

drawing 2. Click the Display - All button to ensure that all drawings are shown in the list.

3. Click the Filter - By parts button.

The drawing list shows now only the assembly drawing created from the brace selected in the model. 4. Open the drawing

The brace drawing was created with standard properties and not properties defined for bracing.

A drawing wizard will not create a duplicate drawing for any member already having, e.g. a single-part or assembly drawing.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 200: Tekla Basic

11.3 Edit Drawing Properties We will now define specific drawing properties for both horizontal and vertical bracing and save the properties to be used later in the drawing wizard.

As an example we will open one vertical brace drawing for editing. Using this drawing we will save the properties for the horizontal bracing. We will then edit some more properties and save them for the vertical bracing.

We will edit dimensioning protection and part mark properties. To illustrate the effect of single fields, we will first remove the existing dimensions from the drawing.

The editing we will do are just examples of using the drawing properties. The final drawing you get depends on the environment you are using and may not be identical to this example.

Study the Online help for information on each of the separate fields available in the drawing properties. Help: Drawing > Dimensioning

Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties

Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by changing the drawing properties. These modifications remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change. You can also use saved drawing properties in wizards.

1. Right-click on the drawing and select Properties… to open the Assembly drawing

properties. Load properties no_dimension

2. Load the predefined properties no_dimensions.

3. Click Modify.

The drawing now appears without any dimensions and only the main view is visible.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 201: Tekla Basic

By default, Tekla Structures creates the additional views only if it is necessary in order to show the dimensions in the drawing.

However, for our purposes, we want to have both the front and top views in the brace drawings regardless of the dimensions that may be needed. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click the View… button Display both front

and top views 2. Choose the option on for the Front and Top views

3. Click Apply and then Modify

Now both the front and top views are displayed.

The first dimension we will add is the main part overall dimension. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Dimensioning… > Part

dimensions. Main part overall dimension

2. Select Once for Main part overall dimensions.

3. Click Apply and then Modify.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 202: Tekla Basic

The main part overall dimension appears.

We will next add the dimension between the extreme bolts. 1. On the Bolt dimensions tab select Assembly for Extreme bolts. Extreme bolts

2. Click Apply and Modify.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 203: Tekla Basic

The distance between the extreme bolts appears.

We then continue by dimensioning the main part cuts

To dimension the cuts in the main part: Main part shape

1. On the Part dimensions tab turn Main part shape: to On.

2. Click Apply and then Modify.

Help: Drawing > Dimensioning > Dimension planes

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 204: Tekla Basic

The dimensions of the cuts appear in absolute dimensions. This is due to the dimension type defined in the Assembly – Dimension properties tab. We will change the dimension type to relative. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Dimension… Change

dimension type from absolute to relative

2. Change the Dimension types / In X direction to relative (see fig below).

3. Click Apply and then Modify.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 205: Tekla Basic

The dimensions of main part cuts now appear as relative dimensions.

By commenting environment variable, XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS, out the shape dimensions would always be relative despite the option chosen in the Dimension properties dialog box.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 206: Tekla Basic

You can protect areas in drawings to prevent text or dimensions being placed there. This way you can e.g. prevent the part mark (1012 in the fig. above) overlapping with the dimension line.

Protection

In cases where Tekla Structures can not find a free place for an object the objects will overlap with each others despite the switches in the protection dialog box.

1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Protection.

2. Select the checkboxes shown below. These options define that Part marks may not overlap dimension lines.

3. Select the checkboxes shown below. These options define that dimension lines may not overlap parts.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 207: Tekla Basic

4. Click Apply and then Modify

We will now save the properties that we have applied so far for horizontal bracing. We will then continue to edit the drawing little and save the properties for vertical bracing.

For vertical bracing we want to see the secondary part bolt internal dimensions and change the part mark frame little. 1. Type bracing_H in the Name: field of Assembly drawing properties dialog box. Save as

properties for bracing_H 2. Type bracing_H_TR in the Save as field, click the Save as button

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 208: Tekla Basic

We will now add bolt dimensions to the vertical bracing. 1. On the Assembly - Dimensioning properties > Bolt dimensions tab select Internal for

Secondary part bolt internal dimensions. Secondary part bolt internal

2. Click Apply and then Modify.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 209: Tekla Basic

The bolt distance dimensions of the gusset plates appear.

We will next change the part mark frame to be rectangular. Change the frame of part marks

On the Assembly - part mark properties / General tab: 1. Change the Frame around mark to rectangular.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 210: Tekla Basic

2. Click Apply and then Modify

The frames of part mark change to rectangular.

1. Type bracing_V in the Name: field of Assembly drawing properties dialog box. Save as

properties for bracing_V 2. Type bracing_V_TR in the Save as field, click the Save as button

11.4 Create New Drawing Wizard We will next create a new drawing wizard that matches the select filters created earlier and the available drawing properties. We will add two new drawing requests to create horizontal and vertical braces and use the new properties defined for them. We will also save the properties for those parts that don't match our wizard to be shown as INCOMPLETE in the drawing list.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 211: Tekla Basic

1. Load standard drawing properties. Create properties INCOMPLETE

2. Edit the Name: field to INCOMPLETE.

3. Save as the properties with name INCOMPLETE.

We will now use an existing wizard as the basis for constructing our own wizard.

To create a new drawing wizard, we will perform the following steps: 1. Open an existing wizard file.

2. Save it with another name.

3. Modify the new file.

4. Test the functionality of the new wizard.

The following links present more information on customizing the wizard settings and the contents of a wizard file. Help: System > Files and folders > Customizing Tekla Structures > Creating wizard files

Help: System > Files and folders > Log files > Wizard log

To create the new wizard file: 1. Click the Wizard icon to open the Wizard dialog box. Open existing

wizard file

2. Select Assembly Drawings on the Wizards tab.

3. Click Edit to open the wizard file in a text editor.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 212: Tekla Basic

1. Select Save as… from the File menu of the text editor to save the wizard file with another name.

Save wizard file with another name

2. Browse to the attributes folder under your model folder, enter ASSEMBLY_TR.dproc as the file name and click Save. Note that the file extension has to be .dproc.

3. Check that the ASSEMBLY_TR.dproc file was created in the attributes subfolder by selecting Open model folder from the Tools menu.

The predefined wizard files are located in the ..\countries\*environment*\system folder. In the system folder the wizard files are available for use in all models. Modified and saved wizard files are saved in the same folder, unless you define another destination folder (such as the model folder).

To have the new wizard file shown in the Wizard dialog box, you need to close and reopen the model.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 213: Tekla Basic

1. Open the Wizard dialog box. Modify wizard file

2. Select ASSEMBLY_TR on the Wizards tab and click Edit.

3. Select an existing drawing request for purlins (shown highlighted below) and copy it two times under the original request.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 214: Tekla Basic

4. Edit the requests that you copied, to match the criteria for vertical and horizontal bracing shown highlighted in yellow below.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 215: Tekla Basic

5. Delete the requests that don't match our select filters: Delete requests

• trusses

• ladders

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 216: Tekla Basic

Next we will change all the requests to use the select filters that we defined earlier, for this project. 6. Change the select filters defined for steel parts in this project: Change the select

filters • column_filter to COLUMN_STEEL

• beam_filter to BEAM_STEEL

• purlin_filter to PURLIN

• etc.

7. Edit the last request to be as shown: Request for the rest of the assembly drawings

/* Create rest of assembly drawings */ set_drawing_type(assembly) set_drawing_attributes(INCOMPLETE) set_filter(standard) create_drawings() 8. Click Save to save the changes and to close the text editor. Save the wizard

file

A wizard file is comprised of several sets of drawing requests. The order of these requests is important, since Tekla Structures creates only one drawing for each selected object. The first request that matches the criteria of select filters is applied.

Now we want to ensure that the new wizard file functions correctly. 1. Delete all of the assembly drawings in the drawing list. Apply own wizard

file 2. Open the Wizard dialog box, select the ASSEMBLY_TR wizard and click Create from

all.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 27 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 217: Tekla Basic

3. Check the drawing list to see that correct drawing properties were used:

• The titles of the created assembly drawings

• INCOMPLETE

• bracing_V, bracing_H

11.5 Create Drawings Manually In Tekla Structures, you can create single-part and assembly drawings by loading and applying predefined drawing properties for layout, dimensions, marks, etc. for selected parts. This process is called the manual creation of drawings, in contrast to the drawing creation with wizards.

The steps for the manual creation of drawings are basically the same as the steps used by the drawing wizard: 1. Select the model objects.

2. Load the predefined drawing properties.

3. Click Drawing > Assembly drawing to create assembly drawings or Drawing > Single-part drawing to create single-part drawings.

Create Assembly Drawings As example, we will create assembly drawings from the columns.

To manually create assembly drawings from all columns:

Open the drawing list and delete all assembly drawings with the title COLUMN. Delete column assembly drawings Create assembly drawings from columns

1. Select the column_filter on the Select switches toolbar and select the whole model.

2. Select Properties > Assembly drawing… in the menu to open the Assembly drawing properties dialog box.

3. Select column properties in the drop-down box next to the Load button.

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 218: Tekla Basic

4. Click Load and OK.

5. Select Drawing > Assembly drawing in the menu to create the assembly drawings.

6. Open the drawing list and check that the correct drawings were created.

You can also use the view filters in the View filter dialog box (opened from the View properties dialog box) to help selecting members in the model for drawing creation.

11.6 Edit Drawings Manually It is possible to manually add and edit additional drawing objects (i.e. dimensions, lines, text, symbols, graphics and marks) in Tekla Structures drawings.

Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by editing only the drawing properties. For example, if you use the drawing properties to modify the drawing, the modifications remain if the drawing must be recreated due to a model change.

We will now edit a brace_H drawing manually to include same editing that we defined for vertical brace_V drawing properties (the bolt distance dimensions and the rectangular part mark frame). 1. Open the first bracing_H drawing in the drawing list. Add bolt distance

dimensions 2. Click Create Y dimension icon.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 29 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 219: Tekla Basic

3. Pick the center points of bolts to be dimensioned.

4. Move the cursor to where you want the dimension to appear and click the middle button.

To move the dimension: Select it and drag it to the desired position.

Add the bolt dimension to the other end the same way. 1. Double-click one of the part marks to open Part mark properties dialog box. Change the frame

of part marks 2. On General tab change the Frame around mark to rectangular and tick only this check

box.

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 220: Tekla Basic

3. Select all the part marks in the drawing.

4. Modify.

Now all the part marks in the drawing have rectangular frames.

5. Close the drawing, click Save in the confirmation dialog box.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 31 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 221: Tekla Basic

1. Open the second bracing_H drawing. Edit the other bracing_H drawing 2. Add the bolt distance dimensions.

3. Change the frame of part marks to rectangular.

4. Close the drawing, click Save and Freeze in the confirmation dialog box

An F appears in the drawing list to show this drawing is frozen.

Now the drawings of the horizontal bracing have the same editing as the vertical bracing. The difference is that part of the horizontal brace editing was done manually.

11.7 Updating Assembly and Single-part Drawings We will now modify our model by changing the bolt spacing of all of the gusset plate connections. Changes in the model will result in some of the drawings will no longer be up-to-date. To be able to open the drawings you will need to run numbering and update them.

We will study how updating effects the edited drawings.

Updating will:

• Regenerate any drawings with a P flag that are unfrozen, the updating deletes all the manual editing (added dimensions, texts etc.).

• Update the quantities on a drawing with an N flag.

• Switch the P flag on a frozen drawing to an *. This indicates that the picture (the parts and bolts) and the marks of the member have been updated but not the dimensions.

Changes in the Model 1. Select all the connections in the model. Change gusset

plate bolt spacing 2. From the page 4 connection toolbar, double-click the Tube gusset (20) icon.

3. Check that the Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box.

4. In the Tubebolts1, Tubebolts2 and Tubebolts3 tab pages edit the vertical bolt spacing to 80 as shown below.

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 222: Tekla Basic

5. Click Modify.

Now the model has changed and some of the drawings are no longer up to date. To be able to open the drawings you need to run numbering and update them.

Select Tools > Numbering > Modified. Run numbering

Once the numbering is carried out the flags in the Drawings list shows all of the affected drawings that need to be updated. Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing status flags

The vertical brace drawings were created with only the predefined drawing attributes. They will be complete right after updating, since they are simply recreated using their own attributes.

Update vertical brace drawings

To update drawings: 1. Select the bracing_V drawings from the list.

2. Click Update.

3. Open the drawings to see that they are ok.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 33 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 223: Tekla Basic

Since the drawing is not frozen the updating regenerates the drawing but deletes all the manual editing (in this case the added bolt dimensions and part mark frame change).

Update not frozen horizontal brace drawing

There is no Undo for the updating the drawings command.

1. Select the bracing_H drawing that is not frozen.

2. Click Update.

3. Open the drawing

You can see the manually added dimension has disappeared and the part mark frame is back to rounded.

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 224: Tekla Basic

Updating a frozen drawing updates the picture of the member and the marks, but not the dimensions or manual editing. We will need to fix up any dimensions that need updating.

The fact that a lot of time can be spent editing drawings, it is advisable to always freeze manually edited drawings. If major modifications in the model create problems with a drawing you can always recreate the drawing with the automatic settings.

To update frozen drawings: Update frozen horizontal braze drawing 1. Select the frozen bracing_H drawing from the list.

2. Click Update.

3. The P gets replaced by an *.

4. Open drawing with an *.

You can see that the bolt dimension still appears but is not correct.

Updating a frozen drawing can lead to a situation of incomplete or erroneous dimensioning. You must manually complete or edit the dimensioning.

5. Select the dimension line and click the Add / remove dimension point icon.

6. Pick the correct points (the center points of bolts) to dimension.

7. Click Add / remove dimension point icon.

8. Use Shift and pick the wrong dimension points to remove them.

The dimension is now correct.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 35 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 225: Tekla Basic

9. Save the drawing and the * flag will be removed.

You can filter up-to-date drawings with Filter > Up to date button. To get non up to date drawings listed press Display > Invert button after Filter > Up to date.

It is not possible to open earlier revisions of the drawings. Due to the integration between drawings and the model a drawing that is not up-to-date cannot be opened.

11.8 Cloning Drawings For more information, see Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Working with drawings > Cloning drawings.

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 226: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 23, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 227: Tekla Basic
Page 228: Tekla Basic

Contents

7 Steel Detailing ..............................................................................................................3

7.1 AutoConnections .......................................................................................................................3 7.2 General about the Criteria the Connections Are Created with ...................................................5 7.3 Study the Connections Created.................................................................................................8 7.4 Create a New AutoConnection Rule Group.............................................................................12 7.5 Run AutoConnection ...............................................................................................................25

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Contents

Page 229: Tekla Basic
Page 230: Tekla Basic

7 Steel Detailing

In this chapter we will first create connections by using default AutoConnection / AutoDefault rules. We then investigate little the logic how certain connections are created to certain positions according the AutoConnection rules.

In this lesson

We will then create new AutoConnection rules for this project, remove the existing connections and replace them using new AutoConnection rules group.

We will also investigate how AutoConnections react to changes in the model.

7.1 AutoConnections You can create connections either manually (as we did in Lesson 2) or by using AutoConnections.

Help: Creating connections

Help: Using Autoconnections

AutoConnections is recommendable way to create connections. Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create connections using a predefined set of rules, or rule group.

With AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates similar connections for similar framing conditions.

As creating AutoConnections you can also choose which connection properties you want to use (AutoDefaults).

Run Default AutoConnections 1. Create or open pre-defined view where only steel members are visible. Delete

connections 2. Select all the connections and delete them.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Steel Detailing

Page 231: Tekla Basic

1. Select all the visible parts in the model. Create auto-connections

2. Click Detailing > AutoConnection... to display the AutoConnection dialog box.

3. Select a default rule group Basic for AutoConnection.

4. Select a default rule group Factory defaults for AutoDefaults.

5. Click the Create connections button.

The connections are created.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 232: Tekla Basic

7.2 General about the Criteria the Connections Are Created with

The AutoConnection setup is a tree structure containing rules.

To apply a particular connection, the conditions within the model have to match all the rules in the branch containing the connection.

The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model.

Rule Group The 1st level in the tree is the rule group, a user defined group of rules for different standards, projects, manufacturers or models.

You can create connections using predefined rule group in AutoConnection dialog box (as we did above).

Framing Conditions The 2nd level shows the six different predefined framing conditions in AutoConnection setup which you cannot change.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Steel Detailing

Page 233: Tekla Basic

Rule Sets Under each framing condition you can create rule sets to specify which connection to use for specific conditions within the model.

Each rule set can include several single rules to filter the cases.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 234: Tekla Basic

The name of the rule set is just descriptive name that is displayed in the tree structure. The actual filtering is done according to criteria set in the rules.

Connections Under each rule set you can select the connection to apply if the rule set criteria is met. It is also possible to select that in this case no connection is created.

The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic, lowest.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Steel Detailing

Page 235: Tekla Basic

You can change the priority of a rule set by right-clicking the rule set and selecting Move Up or Move Down.

7.3 Study the Connections Created We will now study two beam to beam web connections created by default rule group Basic.

End Plate 1. Double-click one of the straight beam to beam web connections around the silos. Check rule set

used It appears to be End plate (144).

2. From the Beam to beam web framing condition in the AutoConnection setup check the names of the rule sets.

No other rule set name (Round tube, RHS, CHS, Bracing) seems to match with the conditions in the model but the Default.

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 236: Tekla Basic

3. Right-click the Default rule set and select Edit rule set... to open the AutoConnection Rules dialog box.

You can see there are no rules defined in the right pane under Rules in rule set.

Since the Default rule set does not have any rules defined all the Beam to beam web framing conditions that don't match with any other rule sets will match with the Default rule set.

This is also the case with our example.

Tube Gusset 1. Double-click one of the horizontal brazing connections in the grid line 1. Check rule set

used

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Steel Detailing

Page 237: Tekla Basic

It appears to be Tube gusset (20) connection.

2. From the Beam to beam web framing condition in the AutoConnection setup check the names of the rule sets.

From the tree we can see the first rule set name that could match with our example condition is RHS.

3. Right-click the RHS rule set and Select Edit rule set...

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 238: Tekla Basic

The only rule it includes is the Secondary 1 profile type = 8 (square pipe, see the table below). So the rules match and the connection Tube gusset (20) is created.

4. Close the AutoConnection Rules dialog box.

We will also study the next rule set that could have matched with the condition.

5. Right-click the Bracing rule set and select Edit rule set...

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Steel Detailing

Page 239: Tekla Basic

We can see the only rule is Secondary 1 Part name = BRAC*. So also the Bracing rule set matches with the condition in our example. However since the RHS rule set is before Bracing rule set it is used and connection 20 created instead of connection 11.

Study some more connections from the model. Study some connection more

Finally delete all the connections from the model. Delete the connections

7.4 Create a New AutoConnection Rule Group

We will now create a new AutoConnection rule group for this project.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 240: Tekla Basic

We will create a rule group that automatically creates the connections created manually in Lesson 2 added with some connections needed for the Model2.

In this exercise we will create following rules for framing conditions:

Framing condition

Rule set name

Rules in rule set Connection

Beam to beam web

Purlin Secondary1 part name = PURLIN

Cold rolled overlap, page13

Bracing Secondary1 profile type = 8

Tube gusset (20), page 4

Default No rule Shear plate simple (146), page 1

Beam to column web

Two sided Number of secondaries = 2 Secondary1 part name = BEAM Secondary2 part name = BEAM

Two sided end plate (142), page 1

Bracing Secondary1 profile type = 8

Tube gusset (20), page 4

Default No rule End plate (144), page 1

Beam to column flange

Crane support

Secondary1 profile = IPE450

Welded Column with stiffeners (128), page 3

Default No rule End plate (144), page 1

We will define rule sets for framing conditions

• Beam to beam flange

• Beam splices

• Column splices

since we do not have those connections in our model.

Create Rule Group Industrial Building Connections 1. Click Setup >AutoConnection… to open AutoConnection setup dialog box. Create new rule

group 2. Right-click the Basic rule group and select New rule group.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Steel Detailing

Page 241: Tekla Basic

A new rule group named New appears.

3. Select the New rule group, press F2 key and edit the name to Industrial building connections.

Beam to Beam Web We will start creating rule sets for Beam to beam web framing condition. By default the framing conditions do not have any rule sets defined, only connection type No connection.

Create Default connection 1. Right-click a connection No connection in the AutoConnection setup tree.

2. Select connection type... to open the Connection Browser dialog box.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 242: Tekla Basic

3. Select Shear plate simple (146) connection and click OK to update the tree.

The tree is updated.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Steel Detailing

Page 243: Tekla Basic

We will now create additional rule sets to Beam to beam web framing. Rule for purlin connections

1. Right-click Beam to beam web framing condition and select Create additional rule sets.

Two rule sets, New and Default appear. The connection we chose appears now under both rule sets New and Default.

2. Right-click the rule set New and select Edit rule set...

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 244: Tekla Basic

The AutoConnection Rules dialog box opens.

3. Select a rule Secondary 1 part name from the Available rules list.

4. Click the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list of Rules in rule set.

5. Edit PURLIN as the Exact value for the rule.

6. Edit Purlin as the name for the rule set.

7. Click OK and the tree is updated.

8. Select Cold rolled overlap connection for the Purlin rule set.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Steel Detailing

Page 245: Tekla Basic

1. Create an additional rule set to Beam to beam web framing. Rule for Bracing connections

2. Right-click the New rule set created and select Edit rule set…

3. Add the rule for Secondary 1 profile type to be 8 and name the rule as Bracing, click OK.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 246: Tekla Basic

4. Select connection Tube gusset (20) for Bracing rule.

5. Click Apply in the AutoConnection setup dialog box to save the editing so far.

We will now do a simple test to make sure our new rule group works. Test the rules

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Steel Detailing

Page 247: Tekla Basic

1. Select the parts of each conditions we have defined rules for (by using Ctrl).

2. Click Detailing > AutoConnection…

3. Select the Industrial building connections rule group.

4. Select Industrial building rules for connection parameters (the AutoDefaults file we created in lesson 2).

5. Click Create connections.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 248: Tekla Basic

6. Check that a correct connection was created to each condition.

Beam to Column Web Set End plate (144) as the default connection for Beam to column web framing condition. Default

connection

1. Right-click Beam to column web framing condition and select Create additional rule sets.

Two sided End plate

2. Right-click the New Rule set and select Edit rule set...

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Steel Detailing

Page 249: Tekla Basic

3. Edit the rule set to have the following rules:

4. Number of secondaries: 2

5. Secondary 1 part name: BEAM

6. Secondary 2 part name: BEAM

7. Name the rule set to Two-sided and click OK.

8. Select Two sided end plate (142) as the connection for rule two sided.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 250: Tekla Basic

Instead of creating a new rule for Bracing we will now copy the existing Bracing rule from Beam to beam web framing condition.

Bracing

1. Copy the rule Bracing from Beam to beam web framing.

2. Right-click the first rule (Two sided) in Beam to column web framing condition and select Paste rule set.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Steel Detailing

Page 251: Tekla Basic

Beam to Column Flange Set End plate (144) as the default connection for Beam to column flange framing condition. Default

connection

1. Create additional rule sets. Crane support

2. Right-click the New rule set and select Edit rule set.

3. Edit the rule set to have the rules Secondary 1 profile = IPE450.

4. Select Welded column with stiffener (128) from as the connection for rule Crane girder.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 252: Tekla Basic

5. Click OK in the AutoConnection setup dialog box.

7.5 Run AutoConnection 1. Select the whole model. Create

connections 2. Click Detailing > AutoConnection…

3. Select the Industrial building connections rule group.

4. Select Industrial building rules for connection parameters (the AutoDefaults file we created in lesson 2).

5. Click Create connections.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Steel Detailing

Page 253: Tekla Basic

6. Check that a correct connection was created to each condition.

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Steel Detailing

Page 254: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 26, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 255: Tekla Basic
Page 256: Tekla Basic

Contents

8 Concrete Detailing....................................................................................................... 2

8.1 Connecting Concrete Members Using Connections and Macros...............................................2 8.2 Add Reinforcement to Concrete Members...............................................................................11 8.3 Add Components to Concrete Members..................................................................................27

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Concrete Detailing

Page 257: Tekla Basic

8 Concrete Detailing

This lesson explains how to modify and finalize concrete members and build cast units, in Tekla Structures. You will also learn how to put in reinforcements both interactively and with the help of macros.

In this lesson

Concrete detailing can be done manually or by using system connections, which help you to automate the detailing. See more about concrete detailing in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Concrete detailing and about connections in Help: Detailing > Getting Started > Basics > Connection concepts.

Introduction

For fully automatic connection creation, you can use AutoConnection functionality to select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts. Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create similar connections for similar framing conditions. See more about AutoConnections in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Getting Started > AutoConnection > Using AutoConnection.

You can create reinforcement interactively, i.e. manually bar by bar or in rebar groups. Rebar group consists of several identical reinforcing bars. You can also use reinforcing macros for automatic and parametric reinforcement creation. Reinforcement created in the latter way is updated automatically if the dimensions of the reinforced concrete part change. See more about reinforcements in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Getting started with reinforcement.

8.1 Connecting Concrete Members Using Connections and Macros

In this exercise we will use system connections to connect the concrete beams and columns and to fit the hollow core slabs to steel beams. You can create connection macros either by using AutoConnections or manually. See more about connections in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Getting Started > Basics > Connection consepts and about AutoConnections in Help: Detailing > Getting Started > AutoConnection > Using AutoConnection.

AutoConnections is the recommended way to create connections. Use AutoConnections to automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts.

Create Corbels Using AutoConnections and AutoDefaults There are six basic cases for AutoConnections: Define conditions

for AutoConnections

2 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 258: Tekla Basic

For each of these it's possible to define several framing conditions. We will now define conditions to use the Corbel connection (14), which will create corbels and connect beams to columns if only one beam is to be connected. For two beams we will use Two sided seating with dowel (76) connection.

1. Open the AutoConnection setup dialog by selecting AutoConnection… from Setup pull down menu.

2. Right click on Beam to column web rule group and select Create additional rule sets. Tekla Structures creates a New rule set under Beam to column web rule group.

3. Open the Beam to column web rule group and right click on New rule set and select Edit rule set… from popup list.

4. Change the Rule set name to describe the use (Concrete Column).

5. Select Primary material name and Secondary 1 material name from Available rules list and move them to the right by clicking the arrow in the middle of the dialog.

6. Write K* to Exact value field for both rules.

7. Add a new rule Number of secondaries by selecting it from the Available rules list and clicking the arrow.

8. Set the Exact value to 1.

9. Press OK to close the dialog and save the rule settings.

10. Open the Concrete Column rule set and right click on the No connection icon to select the Corbel connection (14). Now pick Select connection type…, which opens Connection Browser.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Concrete Detailing

Page 259: Tekla Basic

11. In Connection Browser select Corbel connection (14). Close the browser by clicking OK.

12. You have now completed one rule definition. Next copy the rule set to apply also in Beam to column flange condition by right clicking on Concrete Column rule set and selecting Copy rule set from popup menu.

13. Open the Beam to column flange rule group and right click on any rule set and select Paste rule set from popup menu. You have now defined beam to column connection for concrete members to be always Corbel connection (14) if number of secondaries is 1.

14. Next create another rule set for Two sided seating with dowel (76) connection in case there are two beams to be connected to column. Repeat steps 2 – 8. Rule name is: Concrete column (2 sec)

15. Set the Exact value to 2.

16. Add a new rule Secondary 2 material name by selecting it from the Available rules list and clicking the arrow.

17. Write K* to Exact value field.

18. Press OK to close the dialog and save the rule settings.

19. Move the rule set above the Concrete column rule set using right button command Move up.

20. Open the Concrete column (2 sec) rule set and right click on the No connection icon to select the Two sided seating with dowel (76). Now pick Select connection type…, which opens Connection Browser.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 260: Tekla Basic

21. In Connection Browser select Two sided seating with dowel (76). Close the browser by clicking OK.

22. Next copy the rule set to apply also in Beam to column flange condition by right clicking on Concrete column (2 sec) rule set and selecting Copy rule set from popup menu.

23. Open the Beam to column flange rule group and right click on any rule set and select Paste rule set from popup menu.

With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different pre-defined connection properties. When the connections need to be modified (for example changing the beam size), Tekla Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using AutoDefaults rules defined by you. See more in Help: System > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults setup > AutoDefaults setup. We will now add an AutoDefault rule for Two sided seating with dowel (76) and use it in Industrial building rule group, which we created in Lesson 2.

Define AutoDefaults

1. Open AutoDefaults setup dialog from Setup > AutoDefaults… pulldown menu.

2. Browse to Two sided seating with dowel (76) under Industrial building rules group.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Concrete Detailing

Page 261: Tekla Basic

3. Right click to create an additional rule set.

4. Select the New rule set under Two sided seating with dowel (76) and select Edit rule set… from right click popup menu.

5. Write new name for the rule set: Corbels400-800.

6. Select Primary depth from Available rules list and move it to the right using arrow button in the middle of the dialog.

7. Set Minimum value to 400 and Maximum value to 800.

8. Press OK to save the settings and close the dialog.

9. Select connection parameters Standard.j30000076 under the Corbels400-800 rule set and right click > Additional connection parameters...

10. Select the new connection parameters and right click > Edit connection parameters. The connection properties dialog opens.

11. On the General tab, select the Industrial building rules group; it can also be None.

12. On all the tabs, set the fields that you want AutoDefaults to override to Default by selecting the options marked with the arrow symbol.

13. Set all needed options, values and dimensions on all tab pages as below.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 262: Tekla Basic

14. Save the settings using Save as field, put name Corbels400-800.

15. Close the dialog with OK.

16. Right click on the connection parameters and pick Select connection parameters…

17. Select Corbels400-800.j30000076 from Attribute File List.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Concrete Detailing

Page 263: Tekla Basic

18. Close the Attribute File List with OK.

19. Close the AutoDefault setup dialog with OK.

We will now use the AutoConnections and apply the AutoDefault rules, which we just defined.

Create connections

1. Select all concrete beams and columns between grid lines C and F.

2. From Detailing pull down menu select AutoConnection…

3. Select Industrial building rules group for connection parameters.

4. Press Create connections button. TeklaStructures creates connectons between concrete beams and columns using Corbel connection (14), which will create corbels and connect beams to columns if only one beam is to be connected. For two beams Two sided seating with dowel (76) connection is used.

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 264: Tekla Basic

Create Cuts to Hollowcore Slab Corners We will next fit the hollowcore slab corners to the steel columns. For this we'll use connection Grating penetration (92).

Define cut size

1. Double click the Grating penetration (92) icon to open the properties dialog.

2. Set Penetration type to Rectangular and clearance around I-profile to 20 mms.

3. Close the dialog with OK.

Next zoom in to any hollowcore slab corner, which collides to I-profile column and create the cutting.

Create the cuts

1. Pick the Grating penetration (92) icon.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Concrete Detailing

Page 265: Tekla Basic

2. Pick the hollowcore slab.

3. Pick the I-profile column.

Tekla Structures creates a cut to hollowcore slab at 20 mm distance around the I-profile column.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all other hollowcore slab corners, which collide to I-profile columns.

Create In-situ Slabs Before we add reinforcements to concrete members we need to create additional 600 mms wide in-situ slabs beside the hollowcore slab area in first and second floors. For this, zoom in to first floor in grid lines A and 5 – 6.

1. Double click the Create concrete slab icon.

2. Set the profile height to 175 mm.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 266: Tekla Basic

3. Press OK to close the dialog.

4. Start picking the polygon shape at the middle of the hollowcore slab in grid line 5.

5. Write: R then add 0, 600, to the Enter a numeric location dialog and press OK.

6. Write: R then add 6050, to the Enter a numeric location dialog and press OK.

7. Write: R then add 0, -600, to the Enter a numeric location dialog and press OK.

8. Close the polygon with middle button.

Now select the slab and copy it 3500.00 mms in z-direction using Copy > Translate… right button command.

8.2 Add Reinforcement to Concrete Members

Create Rebars Using System Rebar Macros Once you have created and detailed a model of concrete parts, you may need to reinforce the parts. Reinforcing macros create the entire reinforcement of a part in one go. The reinforcement is created according to the macro attributes. Reinforcement created using macro is updated automatically if the dimensions of the reinforced concrete part change.

See more about reinforcements in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Getting started with reinforcement and in Help: Detailing > Basic reinforcement properties.

We will first put reinforcements into 1800*1800 pad footings, which are 650 mms height. For this we use the Pad footing (77) reinforcing macro. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Reinforcement reference > Pad footing (77)

Pad Footings

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Concrete Detailing

Page 267: Tekla Basic

1. Double click the Pad footing (77) reinforcing macro icon to define the properties to be used.

2. Set cover thicknesses on Picture tab page.

3. Next define primary bars as described below. Select the grade and size from Select reinforcing bar dialog, which opens when you push button in size field. Exit the dialog with OK.

4. Use the same settings for secondary bars and put 12 mm reinforcement in 200 mm intervals.

5. Then you need to set the lacer bars as described below.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 268: Tekla Basic

6. Save the values in Save as field with name 1800*1800-650.

7. Close the dialog with OK.

8. Now pick the pad footings sized 1800*1800*650. The macro generates the reinforcement inside the pad footings.

9. Next we will put reinforcement to 2100*2100*650 pad footings, which are located in grid lines D and E. Repeat steps 1 to 8, now using 12 mm bars in 150 mm intervals both for primary and secondary bars. Save the connection settings with name 2100*2100-650.

10. Still using the macro Pad footing (77), put reinforcements to pad footings sized 2700*2700*650 on grid line F. This time use 16 mm bars in 150 mm intervals for primary and secondary bars. Save the connection settings with name 2700*2700-650.

For pad footings on grid line C we will use a different macro, Pilecap reinforcement (76), which creates reinforcement also to top of the footing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Reinforcement reference > Pilecap reinforcement (76)

1. Double click the Pilecap reinforcement (76), reinforcing macro icon to define the properties to be used.

2. Set cover thicknesses on Picture tab page.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Concrete Detailing

Page 269: Tekla Basic

3. Next define top primary and secondary bars as described below. Select the grade and size from Select reinforcing bar dialog, which opens when you push button in size field. Exit the dialog with OK. With these settings top bars will be created only under columns 150% of column size in both directions.

4. Now define bottom primary and secondary bars using 16 mm bars in 150 mms intervals, bond length in both sides is 700 mms. Bottom bars don't need to suite column, so you can use default in that field and leave % fields empty.

5. Then set 10 mm diameter lacer bars at 200 mm intervals starting at 100 and ending to 700 mms.

6. Save the values in Save as field with name 2700*2700-850.

7. Close the dialog with OK.

8. Now pick first the pad footing sized 2700*2700*850, then the columns on top of the footing. End with middle button. The macro generates the reinforcement inside the pad footings putting top bars under the columns.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 270: Tekla Basic

9. Repeat step 8 for all pad footings on grid line C.

We will next put reinforcements into columns using Beam reinforcement (63) reinforcing macro. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Reinforcement reference > Beam reinforcement (63)

Columns

1. Double click the Beam reinforcement (63) reinforcing macro icon to define the properties to be used.

2. Load predefined column settings by selecting column option from pulldown list and pressing Load button in front of the list.

3. Open Stirrup spacing tab page and empty the zone 3 field settings.

4. Save the values in Save as field with name column600*600-corbel.

5. Press OK to close the dialog.

6. Pick one by one all the columns in grid lines D and E. The macro generates reinforcements inside the columns.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Concrete Detailing

Page 271: Tekla Basic

7. Next we will put reinforcement to 900*600 columns, which are located in grid lines C and F. Reopen the Beam reinforcement (63) reinforcing macro dialog and use the settings described below.

8. Save the values in Save as field with name column900*600-corbel.

9. Press OK to close the dialog.

10. Pick one by one all the columns in grid lines C and F. The macro generates reinforcements inside the columns.

We will next put reinforcements into beams using the same Beam reinforcement (63) reinforcing macro, which we used for columns. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Reinforcement reference > Beam reinforcement (63)

Beams

1. Double click the Beam reinforcement (63) reinforcing macro icon to define the properties to be used.

2. Load predefined settings by selecting standard option from pulldown list and pressing Load button in front of the list.

3. Press OK to close the dialog.

4. Pick one by one all the concrete beams between grid lines C and F. The macro generates reinforcements inside the beams cutting the bottom bars at the corbels.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 272: Tekla Basic

We will next put reinforcements into cast in-situ slabs using Slab bars (18) reinforcing macro. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Reinforcement reference > Slab reinforcement (18)

Slabs

1. Double click the Slab bars (18) reinforcing macro icon to define the properties to be used.

2. Define cover thickness to be used. And set the bars to be created to both sides using slab x direction.

3. Open Bottom bars tab page and set the bar diameter to 10 mm, spacing in both directions to 200 mms.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Concrete Detailing

Page 273: Tekla Basic

4. Use the same settings for top bars.

5. Save the values in Save as field with name Slab175.

6. Close the dialog with OK.

7. Pick the cast in-situ slabs one by one. The macro generates reinforcements inside the slabs.

We will next put lifting anchors into beams and columns using Lifting anchor (80) macro. The macro generates lifting anchors according to center of gravity. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Reinforcement reference > Lifting anchor (80).

Lifting hooks

1. Double click the Lifting anchor (80) macro icon to define the properties to be used.

2. Select anchor shape to be used.

3. Define anchor dimensions.

4. Select anchor size and grade.

5. Save the values in Save as field with name column600*600.

6. Press OK to close the dialog.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 274: Tekla Basic

7. Pick one by one all the columns in grid lines D and E. The macro generates lifting anchors inside the columns.

8. Using the Lifting anchor (80) macro, put anchors to columns sized 900*600 on grid lines C and F. This time use 2 times 9 mm bars in 50 mm intervals and dimension them to be 700 mms inside the column. Save the connection settings with name column900*600.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Concrete Detailing

Page 275: Tekla Basic

The macro generates lifting anchors in pairs inside the columns.

9. Still using the Lifting anchor (80) macro, put anchors to concrete beams between grid lines C and F. This time use one 11 mm bar and dimension them to be at 400 mms depth inside the beam, change the anchor shape as well. Save the connection settings with name beam800*600.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 276: Tekla Basic

The macro generates lifting anchors inside the beams.

Create Rebars Interactively Once you have created reinforcements to concrete parts with the help of macros, you may need to complete reinforcing interactively, i.e. manually bar by bar or in rebar groups. Rebar group consists of several identical reinforcing bars.

Every reinforcing bar has basic attributes such as grade, diameter, and bending radius. If a group of bars is to be created, the number of bars and creation method definition are also needed.

See more about reinforcements in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Reinforcement reference > Reinforcing bar and Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Reinforcement reference > Reinforcing bar group

We will start interactive reinforcing modeling with single rebars and we will put side reinforcement to the in-situ slabs, which we modeled earlier in this lesson. For this, zoom in to first floor in grid lines A and 5 – 6 so that you can see the slab. Create part basic views (select part and right click, select command Create view > Part basic views) to help you in modeling.

Create single rebars

1. To create a single reinforcing bar, double-click the Create reinforcing bar icon.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Concrete Detailing

Page 277: Tekla Basic

2. Select the needed rebar from dialog, which opens by pressing Select… button. Size, grade and bending radius are all defined together. Close the dialog with OK.

3. Use No hook option for both ends.

4. Set start segment and end segment to be defined by Leg length. Now give first and last segment length.

5. Close the dialog with OK.

6. Pick the lower slab.

7. Next define the rebar shape by picking a U-shaped polyline. You can start at any position at the short side of the slab, because the first segment will be 1000 mms.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 278: Tekla Basic

8. Second and third positions are at the corners of the slab.

9. You can make the fourth pick the same way as the first one, at any position at the opposite short side of the slab, because the last segment will be 1000 mms.

10. End the polyline pick with middle button. A single reinforcing bar is created.

11. Next select the new reinforcing bar and Copy > Translate… it 175.00 mms in z-direction.

12. Double click the copied reinforcing bar and change the From plane cover thickness to –35 mms, then press Modify.

We will continue reinforcing the same in-situ slab and put a reinforcing group interactively to the outer side of it.

Create rebar group

1. To create a rebar group, double-click the Create reinforcing bar group icon. The Rebar attributes dialog box appears. It is similar to the single bar case but there is the additional Group tab.

2. Define settings for 10 mms diameter stirrup in General tab page using standard 135-degree hook and 500mms leg length at both ends, with 25 mms cover thickness in on plane direction and 100 mms in from plane direction.

3. Open Group tab page.

4. Set the group creation method to exact spacing with 200 intervals using normal group type.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Concrete Detailing

Page 279: Tekla Basic

5. Close the dialog by pressing OK.

6. Pick the in-situ slab.

7. Now define the rebar shape by picking a polyline, same way as with single rebar. Again, start and end at any position at the short side of the slab, because the first and last segments will be 500 mms. End the polyline pick with middle button.

8. Next define the group location by picking start and end positions at long side corners. A rebar group is created.

We will next copy the in-situ slab reinforcements to upper floor slab. Copy rebars

1. Select the single rebars and the rebar group, which we created in previous exercise.

2. Right click and select Copy > Translate… command.

3. Insert 3500 in z-direction.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 280: Tekla Basic

4. Press Copy in the dialog. The selected rebars are copied and automatically attached to the upper floor slab.

5. Check the cast unit content by selecting the slab with Alt button down.

Now we will use a standard size mesh to reinforce the large cast in-situ slab, which is located in grid lines C to F and 1 to 7.

Mesh reinforcements

See more about mesh in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Reinforcement reference > Reinforcement mesh.

1. To create a rebar mesh, double-click the Create reinforcement mesh icon. The Reinforcement mesh properties dialog box appears.

2. Define the mesh type to be rectangle.

3. Set size and spacing to be 8 mm diameter, with 200 mms spacings in both directions.

4. Define dimensions to 2350 * 5000 mms.

5. Define 50 mm cover thickness around the mesh.

6. Save the values using Save as function with name: 8-200,5000_2350.

7. Close the dialog with OK.

8. Pick the slab.

9. Show position and creation direction by picking two points along grid F.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Concrete Detailing

Page 281: Tekla Basic

Now we will copy the standard mesh reinforcement to cover the whole slab area. Copy Mesh Reinforcement

1. Select the mesh and right click > select Copy > Translate… command.

2. Put –2000 in dY direction and 16 in dZ direction and copy one time by pressing Copy.

3. Next select the both mesh reinforcements and repeat the copy, this time only in dY direction using value –4000, 5 copies.

4. Double click the last mesh near grid line C and change the width to 1800, then press Modify.

5. Now select all the mesh reinforcements and right click > select Copy > Translate…, this time one copy -4600.00 in dX direction and 16 in dZ direction.

6. Again select all the mesh reinforcements and copy 3 times -9200.00 in dX direction.

7. Double click one of the last mesh reinforcements near grid line 1 and change the length to 4350, then select all the mesh reinforcements near grid line 1 press Modify.

We have now completed the standard mesh reinforcements for the whole slab.

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 282: Tekla Basic

8.3 Add Components to Concrete Members

Column Shoe Connection Next we will use components to connect the concrete columns to footings interactively. You can use ready-made components in Tekla Structures by importing them to the model folder. We will make a user defined connection, which has components inside of it. First we need to acquire the needed components.

1. To import custom components, open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or clicking the icon.

Import Component

2. Right click -> Import… to open Import components dialog.

3. Select the components.uel file to be imported and press OK in the browser. New components AnchorBolt and ColumnShoe appear in the list and they are saved in the model folder.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 27 Concrete Detailing

Page 283: Tekla Basic

Now we will insert the ColumnShoe component to concrete column. Insert the ColumnShoe

1. Select ColumnShoe component from the list.

2. Close ColumnShoe dialog with OK.

3. Zoom in to bottom of column on grid lines C-1 intersection.

4. Pick first column corner to define the column shoe position.

5. Next show direction of the column shoe by picking at any position at column shorter side. ColumnShoe component is created to the column corner.

Next create a part cut to column corner. For this create first part basic views of the column shoe base plate. Check that select switch Select objects in components is pressed down. Then we will create the cutting part and cut the column corner with it.

Create part cut

1. Select the column shoe base plate and right click > Create view > Part basic views.

2. Double click the Create concrete slab icon.

3. Define part height to be 101 mms.

4. Close the dialog with OK.

5. On Part top view pick the polygon position with 4 points. First point is in the column corner, second point in the column shoe plate's outer corner, third point is given numerically: show direction at plate's side and type 90, then press OK on Enter numeric

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 284: Tekla Basic

location dialog. Fourth point is in the column shoe plate's outer corner at opposite side, close polygon with middle button.

6. Now double click the chamfer at inner corner of the concrete slab you just created and set the type rounded with x-value 40 mms, then press Modify.

7. Select the slab and move it to correct position –8 mms in z-direction with right click command Move > Translate…

8. Now we are ready to make the part cut. Pick the Create part cut icon.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 29 Concrete Detailing

Page 285: Tekla Basic

9. Select part to be cut, meaning the column.

10. Select cutting part, meaning the slab. The column corner is cut and the reinforcing macro reacts to the cut by shortening the corner bar and lifting up the lower stirups.

11. The cutting part is no longer needed and can now be deleted. Column corner is now completed.

Next step is to add the anchor bolt to the footing. Insert Anchorbar

1. First we need to create a point to the center of the hole in the column shoe. For this pick the Create divided line points icon.

2. Zoom in to the hole in Part top view window.

3. Pick at the middle of upper and lower segments of the hole, center point is created.

4. Next press Ctrl + F to open the Component catalog dialog.

5. Double click AnchorBolt from the list.

6. Pick the center point you just created.

7. Pick any position at the hole segments. Anchor bolt is created.

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 286: Tekla Basic

8. Select the anchor bolt and move it to correct position using right button command Move > Translate... Set 61.02 in dZ-direction and press Move.

9. The anchor bolt is too long and goes 409 mms below the footing bottom. To modify the bolt length, double click the anchor bolt having select switch Select component pressed down.

10. In AnchorBolt dialog, set Total length value to 750 mms and press Modify. The first column footing corner is now completed.

When one corner has been completed we will copy the components and the cut to the remaining corners of the column. We need to do the copying in two steps, first the cut and then the components.

Copy the objects

1. Select the cut in the column corner.

2. Right click > Copy > Translate. Set 510.00 in dX direction and press Copy. The column corner is cut, but the shape needs modification.

3. Double click the rounded chamfer of the cut to open the Chamfer properties dialog.

4. Select the inner sharp corner and press Modify in the Chamfer properties dialog.

5. Select again the first rounded corner and change the chamfer type to sharp and press Modify. The cut has now correct form.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 31 Concrete Detailing

Page 287: Tekla Basic

We will next copy the components to the same corner. For the copying we need to insert a center point of rotation. Create part basic views of the footing to help modeling.

1. Double click Create parallel point icon and set distances to 300 mms and press OK.

2. On Part top view, pick first the corner, then the intersection of grid line at shorter side of the column.

3. Select the components AnchorBolt and ColumnShoe with select switch Select parent pressed down.

4. Right click > Copy > Rotate…

5. Set rotation angle to 90 degrees around Z. Note that pick mode must be set to View plane.

6. Pick center point of rotation.

7. Press Copy. We now have completed two corners.

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 288: Tekla Basic

We will now complete the opposite side of the column.

1. Copy first both of the corner cuts to the opposite side with Copy > Translate… using 810 mms in dY-direction and then modify the cut shapes as in described in previous part cut copy.

2. Insert new center of rotation point using Create parallel point tool and set distances to 450 mms, pick first corner, and then the intersection of grid line at shorter side of the column.

3. Select the AnchorBolt and ColumnShoe components and right click > Copy > Rotate, pick the new origin and set angle to –180 in Z-direction. Press Copy.

We now have components and cuts around the column.

After all needed parts have been completed we will define cast units, meaning that the steel parts will be attached to correct concrete member. See more about cast units in Tekla Structures Help: Modeling > Parts > Cast units and assemblies.

Define Cast Units

We will first define cast unit of the footer.

1. Select all parts of Anchor bolt components having select switch Objects in components pressed down. Check that no parts, which belong to column shoe, are included.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 33 Concrete Detailing

Page 289: Tekla Basic

2. Then add the footer to the selection and right click > Cast unit > Create cast unit. Anchor bolts will be now automatically become attached to the footer when we in next chapter create a connection of them.

3. Next select the anchor bolts under the steel column and right click > Cast unit > Add to. Then pick the footer. Cast unit for footer is now complete.

4. Repeat step 3 to all footers in grid line C.

5. Now select the parts, which belong to column shoes and add the concrete column to the selection.

6. Right click > Cast unit > Create cast unit. Column shoes will be now automatically become attached to the concrete column when we in next chapter create a connection of them.

7. Check the cast unit contents by selecting footing or column and right click > Inquire > Assembly.

When corners have been completed we will create a user define connection, which has all the components and cuts in it.

Create connection

1. Open Custom element Wizard from Detailing > Define custom element.

2. Select type to be Connection and give a name for it. Add description text. Then press Next>.

3. Select the column, footing and all the components (Note that you have select switch Select parent pressed down) and cuts, then press Next>.

4. Pick the footing to be the main part. Continue by pressing Next>.

5. Pick the column to be the secondary part and press Finish. New connection with name Column. Footing is created and the name appears in Custom elements dialog. We will not parameterize it in this exercise, but use it as it is.

We will now use the Column-Footer connection to all concrete columns. For different size than 900*600 columns, some adjustments are needed.

Use the connection

1. On a connections toolbar, double click the Create custom element icon.

2. Select the Column-Footer connection and press OK.

3. Use first the connection to columns in grid lines C and F. Pick first the footer, then the column.

Now create the connection to one 600*600 column. The components and cuts appear in wrong position and the connection needs modifications.

1. Select the connection and right click > Edit custom element. An editor opens.

2. In editor windows, select the components and cuts and Move > Translate them to correct position 150 mms in dY direction, at both side of the column.

3. In Custom element editor toolbar, select Copy element to library with new name and give a name Column-Footer-600 to it.

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Concrete Detailing

Page 290: Tekla Basic

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 35 Concrete Detailing

4. Close the editor and save it. We have now new connection, which can be used for 600*600 columns.

5. Use the Column-Footer-600 connection to columns in grid lines D and E. Pick first the footer, then the column.

Page 291: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 26, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 292: Tekla Basic
Page 293: Tekla Basic

Contents

9 Numbering and Reports.............................................................................................. 3

9.1 Numbering Basics .....................................................................................................................3 9.2 Number the Model .....................................................................................................................4 9.3 Check the Numbering, Create Reports......................................................................................5 9.4 Example: Change Numbering Settings....................................................................................11 9.5 Example: Change Numbering Series.......................................................................................13 9.6 Start Numbering from Scratch .................................................................................................15 9.7 Create the Reports and Check Part Marks ..............................................................................17

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Numbering and Reports

Page 294: Tekla Basic
Page 295: Tekla Basic

9 Numbering and Reports

This lesson introduces the principles of numbering the model in Tekla Structures. In this lesson

You will learn:

• The options available for numbering your model

• How the marks are assigned in numbering

• How to check part marks

• To use report templates

9.1 Numbering Basics

Defining Numbers to Be Used for Parts You use numbering series to divide part, assembly and cast unit numbers into groups.

For example, you can allocate separate numbering series to different part types (BEAM, COLUMN, BRACING, etc…) or according the floor the part is located in (1st floor, 2nd floor, etc.).

You can name the numbering series to which a part, assembly or cast unit belongs, using the part properties dialog box. The numbering series name consists of a prefix and a starting number.

Part Position and Assembly Position numbers are material specific and apply only to steel by default. Concrete members have part prefix "Concrete", and the starting number is 1 and they have Cast Unit Position number instead of Assembly Position number. See more in Help: Modeling > Parts > Numbering parts > Defining numbers to be used for parts.

Running the Numbering When you initiate the numbering process, Tekla Structures assigns marks to parts, assemblies and cast units.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Numbering and Reports

Page 296: Tekla Basic

You run the numbering by clicking Tools > Numbering > Modified or Tools > Numbering > Full. The Full option will check all parts in the model even if they have not been modified. The Modified option only checks the new and modified parts and is much faster. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Tools > Numbering > Modified

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Tools > Numbering > Full

How the Marks Are Assigned in Numbering In numbering, parts with the same Part prefix and Start number will be compared with each other. All identical parts within such a group will be given the same number. The prefix and start number together define what numbers the part will be given; E.g. if prefix is PC and starting number 1 (steel columns in our model), the numbering result will be PC1, PC2, PC3, etc. Help: Modeling > Parts > Numbering parts > What affects numbering

Numbering Settings Numbering is carried out according to the settings in the Numbering setup dialog box. In the Numbering setup dialog you can define how new or modified parts are handled in numbering, does a profile name affect the part number, what is the degree of tolerance in comparing the parts in numbering, etc. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Numbering > Numbering settings

9.2 Number the Model In lesson 5 Basic modeling 2 we defined the numbering series for our model members. So the members already have the numbering series information but not the actual marks. If we try to create a report or a drawing there will be a warning that the numbering is not up to date.

We will use Inquire object to see the current state of numbering of parts and then we will number the model. 1. Select Inquire > Object… Inquire a part

2. Select any steel column.

The Inquire object dialog box opens. The Part position and Assembly position marks are shown as PC/0 and AC/0 so the numbers shown are 1 less than the starting numbers defined for the column (PC/1 and AC/1). This indicates that the part and assembly have not been numbered yet.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Numbering and Reports

Page 297: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures uses numbers to identify parts, assemblies and cast units when producing drawings and reports. You must have Tekla Structures number the model parts before you can create drawings or reports.

Select Tools > Numbering > Full from the pull-down menu. Run numbering full

Now all the parts, assemblies and cast units in our model have up to date position numbers.

9.3 Check the Numbering, Create Reports We will now check the marks assigned to parts, assemblies and cast units.

1. Select Inquire > Object… Inquire part

2. Select any column

The Inquire object dialog box opens. Now the steel columns have Part position and Assembly position numbers and concrete columns cast unit numbers (the position numbers may differ in your model).

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Numbering and Reports

Page 298: Tekla Basic

The numbering is now up to date and we can create reports. We will next create assembly part list and cast unit list of the whole model. Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing reports > Producing reports on entire model

You can create reports from the early stage of the project to check the model and get pre-bill of material lists at quotation stage, cut lists, bolt lists, weld lists etc.

1. Click the Report icon to display the Report dialog box. Create assembly

part list and cast unit list

2. Select Assembly_part_list report template from the list.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Numbering and Reports

Page 299: Tekla Basic

3. On the Options tab check the options as shown below.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Numbering and Reports

Page 300: Tekla Basic

4. Click Create from all to run a report on the entire model.

The report is now automatically displayed in a dialog. Also the text file is created in the model folder.

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Numbering and Reports

Page 301: Tekla Basic

5. Check the numbering range of the assemblies and parts.

6. Repeat the procedure above to create a cast unit list of the entire model

We will next create a cast unit list of all the concrete columns in our model. We will name the report with a specific name in order to keep the information on the stage of the project.

To keep the report files you have created give them a specific name. If you try to create a report with the existing name, Tekla Structures asks before it overwrites the existing report.

1. Use select filter COLUMN_CONCRETE to select all the concrete columns. Create cast unit

list of concrete columns 2. In the Report dialog box edit report file name to read:

cast_unit_list_COLUMN_02_02_04.xsr.

3. (Next time you create the cast unit list of columns just change the date)

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Numbering and Reports

Page 302: Tekla Basic

4. Click Create from selected.

5. The report is now displayed in a dialog box.

6. Select Tools > Open model folder to check that the actual text file appears in the model folder.

Tekla Structures stores a full numbering history in the file: numbering.history.

The file contains the following model numbering details:

• User who carried out the numbering and the date

• Numbering Full / Modified

• Numbering settings used

• A list of defined numbering series

• Information on the parts, assemblies and cast units numbered

Help: System > Files and folders > Log files > Numbering history log

1. From the menu select: Tools > Display log file > Numbering history log… Study the

numbering history log This displays the numbering history in a dialog box.

2. For addition information on the log file refer to the Tekla Structures Online help.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Numbering and Reports

Page 303: Tekla Basic

When you select a list entry that contains the ID numbers of the parts or assembly, Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.

9.4 Example: Change Numbering Settings You may come across a situation in the middle of the project when you may need to change the numbering settings. For example, if some parts have already been ordered from the workshop you may need to have different part marks for additional parts even if they are the same as existing ones.

We will now choose the numbering setup option Take new number for new parts. As an example, we create some new parts to demonstrate the new numbering setup.

Changing the numbering settings in the middle of the project can be dangerous. In the case where you absolutely need to change the settings in the middle of the project make sure you understand how the changes will affect the part marks.

1. Select the Model 1 beams and columns on grid line 7. Copy beams and

columns 2. Copy them two times 6000 mm in the X direction

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Numbering and Reports

Page 304: Tekla Basic

3. From the menu select: Setup > Numbering… Change numbering settings 4. In the New: field choose the option, Take new number, click Apply

From the menu select: Tools > Numbering > Full. Number the model

Always carry out a full numbering on the model after you have changed the numbering settings.

1. Use the Inquire object command to compare the marks of corresponding old and new

parts. Inquire the result

2. Study the changes in the numbering history log (the position numbers in your model may differ from the example below).

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Numbering and Reports

Page 305: Tekla Basic

9.5 Example: Change Numbering Series By defining the numbering series (numbering prefixes and start numbers) we can group the parts, assemblies and cast units the way we want. This way we can allocate parts in an area of a building to a particular numbering series.

We will now change the numbering series of the outermost frame that we copied by changing the start numbers from 1 to 1000. We will then change the numbering series of the end plates in the frame to 2001, by using the connection dialog box (which will overwrite the position number defined in the preferences dialog box).

1. Select the columns on the outermost frame. Change the numbering series

2. Modify the numbering series (only numbering series) of the columns as shown.

3. Select the beams on the outermost frame.

4. Modify the numbering series of the beams as shown

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Numbering and Reports

Page 306: Tekla Basic

When planning numbering, ensure that you reserve enough numbers for each series. If one series overflows into another, Tekla Structures might allocate the same number to different parts. Tekla Structures will warn you about series overlaps. View the numbering history log to check which numbers overlap.

1. Open the End plate 144 dialog box. Change

numbering series of the connection members

2. On the Plates tab edit the End plate position number to 2001.

3. Modify all the end plate connections of the frame with only the Pos. No field checked.

From the menu select Tools > Numbering > Full. Number the model

Always carry out full numbering on the model after you have changed numbering series.

1. Use the Inquire object command to compare the marks of corresponding old and new parts

Inquire the numbers

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Numbering and Reports

Page 307: Tekla Basic

2. Study the changes in the numbering history log

We will now delete the parts created in this lesson.

Delete the two frames created in this lesson. Delete the frames

9.6 Start Numbering from Scratch After trying different numbering options (changing numbering settings and numbering series) there is a possibility that some earlier unwanted position numbers will remain. There may also be gaps in position numbers.

Before you start creating drawings to issue it is reasonable to start the numbering from scratch.

This method will ensure that each part in the model will really get the position numbers according the updated numbering series defined for them and no previous, unwanted numbers will be left. 1. Select all the parts in the model. Clear Numbers of

all parts 2. From the menu select: Tools > Numbering > Clear selected. 3. Check mark the option Renumber all in the Numbering setup dialog box. Renumber all

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Numbering and Reports

Page 308: Tekla Basic

4. Select: Tools > Numbering > Full.

By using the Unnumber selected command or Renumber all setting you will loose all information about previous numbers. These settings can be safely used only at the beginning of a project.

5. Finally set the numbering setup the way you want numbering to be carried out in the

project. Set the numbering settings for the project

6. Click OK.

7. From the menu select: Setup > Save defaults.

You must save the Numbering setup for the model with command Setup > Save Defaults to restore the options by default when you open the model.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Numbering and Reports

Page 309: Tekla Basic

Use Setup > Load Defaults command to see the saved Numbering setup options.

It is recommended that you normally use Modified numbering.

Here are a few cases in which Full numbering should be run instead of Modified numbering:

• When performing the first numbering after the numbering settings have been changed.

• When Standard part option is used

• When Pop marks are used in DSTV files

9.7 Create the Reports and Check Part Marks

Tekla Structures can produce many different reports from the information contained in the model. Study the available reports. You can also print the report with the Print option.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Numbering and Reports

Page 310: Tekla Basic

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Numbering and Reports

Check the Reports Create the following reports and check the model:

• Part_list - Check the plate thicknesses for abnormalities

• Part_list - Check the numbering range

• Part_list - Check zero lengths of material

• Part_list - Check the steel grades

• Assembly_list - Check the numbering range for steel assemblies

• Assembly_part_list - Check the main item profile (plates or flats may indicate incorrect welding)

• Cast_Sequence_list - Check the numbering range

• Cast_list - Check the main item profile

• Material_list – Check the grades used are correct

• Rebar_schedule_FIN - Check the number and types of rebars

Other Checks Below are listed some other ways to check your model:

• Clash Check the entire model

• Check the erect ability of precast members

• Use the view or select filter to ensure that, beams are called BEAM, columns are called COLUMN etc.

• Check the existence of marks on a marking plan and check that the updating of marks is done

• Check that the Title block information on each drawing is correct

Page 311: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 26, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 312: Tekla Basic
Page 313: Tekla Basic

Contents

10 Principles of Working with Drawings ........................................................................ 3

10.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model............................................................................4 10.2 Creating Drawings .....................................................................................................................5 10.3 Drawing List.............................................................................................................................10 10.4 Drawing Levels ........................................................................................................................14 10.5 Drawing Objects ......................................................................................................................21 10.6 Drawing Layouts......................................................................................................................26 10.7 Plotting Drawings.....................................................................................................................38 10.8 Controlling Drawing Revisions.................................................................................................41

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 314: Tekla Basic
Page 315: Tekla Basic

10 Principles of Working with Drawings

This chapter introduces the principles of working with drawings in Tekla Structures. In this lesson

We will first explain the integration between drawings and the model. Then we will introduce general arrangement (GA) drawings and create an example drawing from the Basic Model 1 model (see the picture below presenting the steel frame). GA drawings will be used as examples throughout this lesson.

We will also:

• Introduce other drawing types available in Tekla Structures

• Introduce the drawing list

• Introduce the various levels of editing the drawings

• Study the drawing objects and layout

• Plot drawings

• Introduce revision control

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 316: Tekla Basic

10.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model

Tekla Structures stores all the important project information in one place, i.e. the model. Drawings and other printouts such as reports, nc data files etc. are output produced directly from the model.

Tekla Structures Model The model contains all the important project information:

• Part's geometrical and structural information

• Part marking

• Bolts

• Bolt marking

• etc.

All the modifications must be done directly in the model. The Tekla Structures Model Editor is used for modifying the model.

Drawings The drawings are current views of the members contained in the model with added definitions for:

• The sheet size to be used

• How titles and tables are placed on the sheets

• What is dimensioned and how

• Which marks are displayed

• etc.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 317: Tekla Basic

You can create drawings at any stage of the project.

Some of the drawing commands are located in the Model Editor and some are in the Drawing Editor. You will find all the commands for creating and managing drawings in the Model Editor. To view and edit drawings, you will use the Drawing Editor. Help: Drawing > Introduction to Drawings

Changes in the model Members Changes in the model members can result in the drawings no longer being up-to-date. The following are examples of changes that affect the drawings:

• A part's profile or geometry changes

• Parts have been added or deleted

• The number of identical parts has changed

Tekla Structures updates the related drawings the next time you number the model. Numbering does not have to be up-to-date to create or open general arrangement drawings.

10.2 Creating Drawings We will now introduce general arrangement (GA) drawings and create an example drawing of the Basic model 1 model.

General Arrangement (GA) Drawings The Tekla Structures can be used to create general arrangement (GA) drawings.

GA drawings can contain several views, which can include the whole model or any part of it. With the GA drawings you can create erection, foundation and other plans, as well as details from views in the model.

You can create general arrangement drawings from one or several named model view(s) with the following options:

• Create one drawing for each selected view

• Add all selected views to one drawing

• Create an empty drawing

You can create an empty drawing and add named model views to the drawing in the Drawing Editor. The views must exist but they do not necessarily have to be open.

You cannot modify the appearance, such as the viewing angle, of model views in the Drawing Editor. Therefore, check and modify the appearance of model views in the Model Editor before creating GA drawings. For example, check that the plan views are really 2D views, and rotate the rendered 3D views the way you want them to be shown in the drawing.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 318: Tekla Basic

See Lesson 13 for more information about creating GA drawings.

In the example below, we will create a general arrangement drawing from Basic Model 1 by including several named model views in the drawing.

You do not need to number the model, or update numbering to create or open general arrangement drawings.

To create a GA drawing that contains selected views, e.g. 3D, GRID 3 and GRID A, from Basic Model 1:

Start GA drawing creation

1. Open Basic Model 1.

2. Select Drawing > General arrangement drawing... from the menu.

3. Select the 3d, GRID 3 and GRID A views in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box. Then select the option All selected views to one drawing.

You can select multiple views (or toggle the selection) in the dialog box above by holding down the Ctrl key and picking each view separately.

GA drawing views are automatically labeled with the current view name.

With the One drawing per view option you can select all the plan views in the dialog box, and create separate drawings with predefined drawing properties all at once.

To define the properties of the GA drawing: Define drawing properties

1. Click the Drawing properties... button to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

2. Select A1-BLANK settings from the option menu and click Load.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 319: Tekla Basic

3. Give the drawing a distinctive name in the Name field, e.g. STEEL FRAME.

4. Click the View... button to open the General - view properties dialog box.

5. On the Attributes tab, change the drawing scale to 100 and click OK to apply the scale and close the dialog box.

6. Click the Weld… button to open the General - welding properties dialog box.

7. On the Content tab, set the Visibility of site and workshop welds to None and click OK.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 320: Tekla Basic

8. Click the Filter... button to open the General - filter properties dialog box.

9. On the Parts tab, use the Filter by Material field to filter drawing objects so that no concrete parts are shown. Enter K* as the filter string, tick the Not option on and click OK.

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 321: Tekla Basic

10. In the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box, save the selected drawing properties with a unique file name, e.g. steelframe, by typing the file name and then clicking the Save as button. Drawing property files steelframe.gd and steelframe.gd.more are created in the ..\Basic Model 1\attributes folder.

11. Click OK to apply the selected GA drawing settings and to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

For more information on drawing properties, see Help: Drawing > Drawing properties.

To create and open the GA drawing: Create and open the GA drawing

1. Select the Open drawing checkbox in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to have Tekla Structures automatically open the drawing.

2. Click Create.

3. Check that the created GA drawing is as shown below.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 322: Tekla Basic

All of the views in the GA drawing will be created according to the same GA drawing properties you applied. If some views need different properties, you have to modify the view properties afterwards in the Drawing Editor.

You can first define the GA drawing properties by selecting Properties > General arrangement drawing... from the menu, and then load and apply the desired properties. After that open the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to create the GA drawing with the selected views.

Other Drawing Types In addition to general arrangement drawings, four other types of drawings can be created in Tekla Structures. These will be presented in greater detail in Lessons 11, 12 and 14.

Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of individual steel parts. Drawings can be produced for any steel part in the model. The single-part drawings can contain holes but welded parts cannot be included. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module.

Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings where details of an assembly consisting of steel parts are presented for fabrication. In most cases, an assembly consists of single steel parts that are either bolted or welded to the main steel part. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module.

Cast unit (CU) drawings are formwork or reinforcement drawings of reinforced concrete structures such as foundations. This drawing type is available in Concrete Detailing module.

Multi-drawings are workshop drawings which gather together several single-part or assembly drawings on one sheet. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module. Lesson 11 Assembly and single-part drawings

Lesson 12 Cast unit drawing

Lesson 14 Multi-drawing and multinumbering

10.3 Drawing List We will briefly cover the Tekla Structures drawing list.

You can use the drawing list to:

• Select and open your drawings for viewing and editing in the Drawing Editor

• Update, clone and delete drawings

• Update GA drawing marks

• Display and filter drawings shown in the list

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 323: Tekla Basic

• Choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the selected parts in the list (not available for GA drawings)

• Lock, freeze and issue drawings

• Add revisions to drawings

The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawing size and type, etc.

See Lesson 13 for updating GA drawings.

Opening and Closing Drawings You can only have one drawing open at a time. If you already have a drawing open, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that drawing before opening the next one.

To open the drawing list and a drawing in Tekla Structures: Open drawing list and a GA drawing

1. Select Drawing > List… from the menu or click the Open drawing list icon on the Standard toolbar.

2. In the drawing list select the previously created G [1] drawing.

3. Click Open, or double-click the drawing to open it in the Drawing Editor.

See also Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Opening drawings.

When selecting GA drawings in the drawing list, the activated buttons at the bottom of the Drawings dialog box are Open, Update marks, Delete and Cancel. The table below describes their functionality.

Button Description

Open Opens the selected drawing in the Drawing Editor. You can only select and open one drawing from the list at a time. If the Open button is grayed, you have selected more than one drawing for opening.

You can also double-click a drawing in the list to open it.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 324: Tekla Basic

Button Description

Update marks

Updates the marks in selected general arrangement drawings.

Delete Deletes the selected drawings. Note that you cannot delete locked drawings.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

To close the drawing in the Drawing Editor: Close a drawing

1. Select File > Close drawing from the menu or click the cross in the upper right corner of the drawing window.

2. Tekla Structures asks: Do you want to save the current drawing?

3. Select Save or Save and Freeze to keep the changes that you have made to the drawing, or close the drawing without saving by clicking No.

Drawing List Contents All of your existing drawings are shown in the drawing list. The example below shows the header line information that is available in the drawing list.

See also Help: Drawings > Getting started with drawings > Drawing list.

The table below explains the header line items of the drawing list that affect GA drawings.

Item Explanation

Issue, Lock

I and L flags can be added to the selected drawings to indicate the drawing's status.

Created Creation date, which is shown automatically.

Modified Modification date, which is shown automatically.

Revision Revision mark or number, which can be added to the selected drawings.

Size Paper size, which is shown automatically.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 325: Tekla Basic

Item Explanation

Type G= General arrangement drawing

Name The number of the general arrangement drawing. You cannot change the drawing name.

Title Defined by the Name field in the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

You can sort the order of the drawings by clicking the desired header line button in the drawing list.

You can adjust the column widths of the drawing list and Tekla Structures will keep the changes.

Drawing Status Flags The status of drawings is represented by flags, which are shown on the left hand side of the drawing list.

For more information about drawing status flags, see Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing status flags.

The table below explains the meaning of the drawing flags. Lock and Issue flags can be manually added to the selected drawings. The M flag appears automatically on issued GA drawings that have been modified.

Flag Explanation

L The drawing is locked. Locking prevents GA drawings from being opened, deleted or modified.

I The drawing has been issued. The issue flag can be displayed for selected drawings that have been sent to the workshop.

M The issued drawing has been edited or otherwise changed.

Lock GA and other drawings from being accidentially deleted or changed.

Use the buttons on the right hand side of the drawing list to change the status of a drawing. Alternatively, select the drawing in the list, right-click to open the pop-up menu and change the drawing status.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 326: Tekla Basic

To lock and unlock a GA drawing: Lock a GA drawing

1. Select the G [1] drawing in the drawing list.

2. Click the Lock - On button and the L flag will appear.

3. Try to delete the drawing by clicking Delete.

4. Try to open the drawing by clicking Open.

5. Click the Lock - Off button to reset the lock.

6. Click Open. The drawing opens in the Drawing Editor.

You cannot open or delete a locked drawing without unlocking it.

To issue a GA drawing: Issue a GA drawing

1. Select the G [1] drawing in the drawing list.

2. Click the Issue - On button and the I flag will appear.

3. Open the drawing to view the GA drawing title.

4. Check that the issue date is shown correctly in the drawing title.

10.4 Drawing Levels You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels:

• Drawing properties

• View properties

• Object properties

For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see the following links: Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Three levels of editing drawings

Help: Drawing > Drawing properties

Lesson 13 GA drawing

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 327: Tekla Basic

Modify Drawing Properties On the highest level you can change the drawing properties, which affect all of the objects in the drawing.

To change the GA drawing properties, e.g. part's color, in the Drawing Editor: Modify part's color on drawing level 1. Select Properties > Drawing... from the menu or double-click the drawing to open the

General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

2. Click the Part... button to open the General - part properties dialog box.

3. Select the Appearance tab.

4. Change the Color of Visible lines, e.g. to green. Check and see that the checkbox is marked with a tick.

5. Click Modify and OK.

Create another GA drawing by following the steps described in Chapter 10.2 Creating drawings. Select different views, e.g. the PLAN +0 and PLAN +13400 views, to be included in the drawing.

To simultaneously change the drawing properties, e.g. grid visibility, of more than one GA drawing:

Change grid visibility of many GA drawings

1. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor.

2. Select two GA drawings in the drawing list by holding down the Ctrl key.

3. Right-click to open the pop-up menu.

4. Select Properties... or press Alt+Enter as shortcut to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 328: Tekla Basic

5. Click the Grid... button to open the General - grid properties dialog box.

6. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes.

7. Change the grid visibility to Not visible.

8. Click Modify and OK.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 329: Tekla Basic

9. Click OK to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

10. Open the modified drawings one at a time to check that changes were carried out correctly.

Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by changing the drawing properties. These modifications also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change.

Modify View Properties The second level is to edit the view level, where you modify the selected drawing's view.

To present hidden lines of adjacent parts and to add part marks to the GRID A view of the G [1] drawing:

Modify properties of selected view

1. Double-click the border around the GRID A drawing view to open the View properties dialog box.

2. Click the Part… button to open the View part properties dialog box. Show hidden lines of parts

3. Select the Content tab.

4. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes.

5. Turn the Hidden lines option on. Check that the checkbox is marked with a tick.

6. Click Modify and OK.

7. Click the Part mark… button to open the View part mark properties dialog box. Change part mark content

8. On the Content tab, remove the <<Assembly position>> from the Elements in mark list for the main parts, and add Profile to the list.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 330: Tekla Basic

9. On the General tab, change the Visibility in view to always and click Modify and OK.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 331: Tekla Basic

The GRID A view should now show the hidden lines of adjacent parts and part marks representing the main part profiles.

Dashed line type in part mark frames and leader lines indicate that the object is behind another object in the drawing.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 332: Tekla Basic

Modify Object Properties The third and lowest level is to edit at the object level, where you change individual objects in the drawing.

To change the properties of a single part mark: Modify frame and leader line of a single part mark 1. In the GRID A view, double-click the part mark of the RHS profile (diagonal brace) to

open the Part mark properties dialog box.

2. On the General tab, change the frame and leader line types as shown below.

3. Click Modify and OK. The part mark should now look like the following.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 333: Tekla Basic

10.5 Drawing Objects In Tekla Structures, the term drawing object refers to lines, rectangles, arcs, circles, polylines, polygons, clouds, symbols, text, DWG/DXF files, marks and dimensions.

General arrangement drawings are not automatically dimensioned in Tekla Structures. Therefore you need to dimension GA drawings manually. In addition, you may want to include additional drawing objects for temporary and/or revision-related information, e.g. clouds and text.

For more information, see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings.

Create Drawing Objects In the G [1] drawing, we will manually dimension the location of the diagonal bracing connection and add a cloud and note text to the connection.

To add manual Y-dimensions to the diagonal bracing connection (on grid line 3) in the GRID A view:

Create manual dimensions

1. Set the snap settings on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar as shown below.

2. To enable the tentative snap, which helps with the selecting of points, check that the Xsnap is set on in the Setup menu.

3. Click the Create y dimension icon on the Drawings: Dimension toolbar.

4. Snap first to the center point of the connection created between the four diagonal braces, and then at the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID +0. Move the cursor to the left side of the GRID 3 to select the location of the dimension line. End the command with middle mouse button.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 334: Tekla Basic

5. Snap again to the center point of the connection and then at the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID +13400, select the dimension line location and click the middle mouse button.

6. Select both dimensions (by holding down the Ctrl key), right-click and select Combine dimension lines from the pop-up menu. The separate dimension lines are now combined to one dimension line. Select the dimension line and move it to the correct location by dragging with the mouse.

You should now have the vertical location of the diagonal brace connection shown in the GRID A view (see the figure below).

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 335: Tekla Basic

To add a cloud and note text to the GRID A view: Create a cloud

1. Click the Snap to any position icon on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar.

2. Click the Draw cloud icon on the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.

3. Pick points for the cloud position around the diagonal bracing connection on grid line 3. End the selection with middle mouse button.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 336: Tekla Basic

1. Select Properties > Text… to open the Text properties dialog box. Create a note text for the cloud

2. Select the standard settings from the option menu and click Load.

3. Change the text properties and frame as shown below and click Apply and OK.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 337: Tekla Basic

4. Click the Create text with leader line icon in the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.

5. First, pick an edge of the cloud as the origin of the leader line and then another point to place the text.

The GRID A view should now look like the figure shown below:

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 338: Tekla Basic

6. Select File > Close drawing and click Save in the Question dialog box.

10.6 Drawing Layouts Now we will have a brief introduction on how the Tekla Structures drawing layouts function.

A drawing consists of the layout and drawing views, e.g. plans, side views, and section views. A layout connects a set of table layouts and a set of drawing sizes. Before you create a drawing, you must select a layout.

The example below illustrates the relationship between the table layout and drawing views. The drawing views are blue, and the elements of table layout are red.

See the following links for more information about drawing layouts: Lesson 13 GA drawing

Help: Drawing > Drawing layout

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 339: Tekla Basic

View Contents of a Drawing Layout An example of a GA drawing layout for the A3 drawing sheet size is shown below. The drawing title and revision table included in this layout are also shown separately and enlarged.

Revision table:

Drawing title for GA drawings:

To view the contents of the GA drawing table layout in the Model Editor: View GA drawing table layout

1. Select Properties > Layout… from the menu to open the Layout dialog box.

2. Select ga in the list of Layouts and click the Table layout… button to open the Table layouts dialog box.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 27 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 340: Tekla Basic

3. Select ga in the list of Table layouts and click the Tables… button to open the Tables dialog box.

4. The content of the ga table layout is presented in the Chosen tables list.

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 341: Tekla Basic

5. Select the drawing_title_ga and revision table one at a time to view their location in the table layout. The former, for example, is bound by its lower right corner to the lower right corner of the drawing frame (that is the reference object).

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 29 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 342: Tekla Basic

6. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Create a New Layout We will use the existing ga layout as basis for creating a new layout for GA drawings.

To create a new layout: Create a new GA drawing layout

1. Open the Layout dialog box from the Properties menu.

2. Select ga from the list of Layouts and type a name for the new layout (as shown below) and click Add.

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 343: Tekla Basic

3. Select the newly created ga_new layout in the list and click Table layout… to open the Table layouts dialog box.

4. Select ga in the list of Table layouts and type a name for the new table layout (as shown below) and click Add.

5. Select the newly created ga_new table layout in the list and click Tables… to open the Tables dialog box.

6. Select drawing_title_ga, revision and tender_document one at a time in the Available tables list and add them (using the arrow button) to the Chosen tables list.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 31 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 344: Tekla Basic

7. Set the location and click Update for each table separately (as shown below).

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 345: Tekla Basic

8. Click OK to apply and close the Tables dialog box.

9. Click Update in the Table layouts dialog box to update the ga_new table layout and click OK to close the dialog box.

10. Click OK to close the Layout dialog box.

The new layout settings were saved with the file name ga_new.lay to the ..\Basic Model 1\attributes folder.

Before using the new layout, we need to define drawing size where it will be used. In Tekla Structures, you have two options how to set the drawing size. You can either:

Define drawing sizes for the new layout

• Specify exact sizes for drawings.

• Let Tekla Structures find appropriate drawing sizes (according to the layout, tables in it, and the drawing view scales).

To define fixed drawing sizes: 1. Reopen the Layout dialog box from the Properties menu.

2. Select ga_new from the list of Layouts and press Fixed sizes…

3. In Fixed sizes dialog, type name ga_new_A3 for new size, define width and height for A3 size drawing (410 x 287), and press Add.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 33 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 346: Tekla Basic

4. Select ga_new from Table layout pull-down menu and press Update. You have now defined ga_new_A3 size to use ga_new layout.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for ga_new_A4, drawing size A4 (287x200).

6. Click OK to close the Fixed sizes dialog box.

7. Click OK to close the Layout dialog box.

To define calculated drawing sizes: 1. Reopen the Layout dialog box from the Properties menu.

2. Select ga_new from the list of Layouts and press Calculated sizes…

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 347: Tekla Basic

3. Connect all sizes to ga_new layout by selecting ga_new from pull-down menu.

4. Click OK to close the Calculated sizes dialog box.

5. Click OK to close the Layout dialog box.

To use the newly created GA drawing layout: Use the new GA drawing layout

1. Open the drawing list and double-click the G [1] drawing to open it.

2. Open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box and click the Layout… button.

3. In the General – layout properties dialog box, click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes.

4. Select the ga_new in the Layout and Table layout fields and click Modify.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 35 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 348: Tekla Basic

5. Check that the drawing layout is changed correctly. The drawing title should be present in lower right corner of the drawing, the revision table and the note TENDER DOCUMENT is as shown below.

When the drawing is modified so that the whole drawing needs to be recreated, the drawing views are rearranged. As a result the views are placed differently thane they were before (see picture below). We will now rearrange them manually.

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 349: Tekla Basic

To move drawing views: Move drawing views

1. Select the view frame of GRID 3.

2. Hold down the Shift key and drag the view with the mouse to the right side of the 3D view.

3. Move the GRID A view correspondingly

Your G [1] drawing should now look like the one shown below.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 37 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 350: Tekla Basic

You can place drawing views more accurately by aligning them horizontally or vertically. For instructions, see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings > Working with drawing views > Aligning drawing views.

10.7 Plotting Drawings Tekla Structures plots drawings both to selected print devices and to file. Single drawings can be plotted from the Drawing Editor, and single or multiple drawings, which have been selected in the drawing list, can be plotted from the Model Editor.

Plotting To plot a single GA drawing from the Drawing Editor: Plot a single GA

drawing 1. Open the G [1] drawing in the Drawing Editor.

2. Select File > Plot current… to open the Plot dialog box, or click the Plot icon on the Drawings: Standard toolbar.

3. Select the print device (plotter) to be used and click Print.

38 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 351: Tekla Basic

For more information about available plot options, see Help: Drawing > Printing > Plot options.

To plot multiple GA drawings from the Model Editor: Plot multiple GA drawings

1. Open the drawing list.

2. Select at least two GA drawings in the drawing list.

3. Click the Plot icon on the Standard toolbar.

4. Select the print device to be used and click Print.

If you select several print devices, Tekla Structures sends each drawing to the device with the smallest paper size, on which the drawing will fit.

For more information about printing to print device, see Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings.

Plotting to a File To plot the G [1] drawing to a file: Plot a GA drawing

as a dwg file 1. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor.

2. Select the G [1] drawing in the list.

3. Click the Plot icon to open the Plot dialog box.

4. Select DWG as the plotting format in the Plotter list. Check that the Plot to file option is marked with a tick.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 39 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 352: Tekla Basic

5. Type .\drawings in the plot file name field below the Plot to file option. This will define the ..\Basic Model 1\drawings folder as the destination folder of plot files.

6. Click Print to plot the drawing to DWG.

7. To give a particular plot file name type, e.g ..\drawings\SteelFrame.dwg in the plot file name field, and click Print.

8. Check that the drawings were successfully plotted to the ..\Basic Model 1\drawings folder. This folder should contain the saved *.dwg drawings.

If you do not enter a file name for the destination plot file, or you have chosen several drawings, Tekla Structures uses the drawing name(s) as file name(s). If you do not enter a folder name, Tekla Structures creates the file(s) in the current model folder.

You can also print a drawing to DWG using the Drawing Editor. Open the selected drawing and follow the above steps, starting at step 3.

Tekla Structures does not distinguish between upper and

40 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 353: Tekla Basic

lower case letters. For example, a drawing named A.1 overwrites a drawing named a.1.

For more information about plotting to file, see: Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings > Printing to DWG/DXF

Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings to file

For more information about defining drawing plot file names and plot directories, see: Help: Release Notes > Xsteel 8.3 > Drawing > Drawing plot file

Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings to file > Switches for naming plotfiles

10.8 Controlling Drawing Revisions Now we will cover the revision handling features of Tekla Structures.

When the model changes:

• You have to update or revise drawings

• Attach revision information to the drawings

Tekla Structures displays the revision information alongside the revision number or mark in the drawing list and in the revision table within the drawings. The revision table also shows the revision date. You can create a list of revisions in a report.

For more information about drawing revisions and creating reports, see the following links: Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Defining drawing revisions

Lesson 9 Numbering and reports

Create, Modify and Delete Revision Marks To add a revision mark to the G [1] drawing: Create revision

mark 1. Modify the model by changing the profile of the columns on grid line 1 from HEA300 to

HEA320.

2. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor.

3. Select the drawing to revise, right-click and select Revision… to open the Revision handling dialog box.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 41 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 354: Tekla Basic

4. Enter the revision mark, revision date and description text of the revision in the dialog box as shown below, and click Create.

Once the revision is created, a revision number is automatically assigned to the drawing. The revision number is shown in the dialog box.

42 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 355: Tekla Basic

5. Check that the revision number is shown in the drawing list.

6. Open the drawing to check that the drawing title and revision table display the revision information correctly.

Several drawings can share the same revision mark, date, and information. To attach the same revision information to several drawings simultaneously, select multiple drawings from the drawing list.

You can choose whether Tekla Structures shows the revision numbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. By default, revision numbers are shown. For more information, see the following links: Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Defining drawing revisions

Help: System > Files and folders > Startup batch file.

To modify the revision information of an existing revision mark: Modify revision information

1. First create a new revision to the G [1] drawing by following steps 2-5 presented above:

• Change the model

• Use B as the revision mark

• Type revision date and description

• Click Create

• Leave the Revision handling dialog box open

2. Select the revision number 2 in the drop-down box next to the Mark field. The corresponding revision information is shown in the dialog box.

3. Change the revision mark to C, modify the description text, and click Modify.

4. Open the drawing to check that the modification is shown correctly in the revision table.

To delete a revision mark: Delete revision mark

1. Select the revision number 2 in the Revision handling dialog box.

2. Click Delete.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 43 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 356: Tekla Basic

3. The updated revision number of the drawing is now 1. Check that the revision number is shown correctly in the drawing list. Open the drawing to check that the revision table is also updated.

When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the remaining revision numbers for that drawing.

Show Revision Mark in Plot File Names When you plot drawings to files such as DWG, DXF or PDF, you can include the latest revision number or mark in the plot file name. In the Plot dialog box, select the checkbox of the Include revision mark to file name option as shown below.

Show Revision Information in a Report The report drawing_issue_rev shows the revision dates and revision information of drawings. For more information about reports see Lesson 9 Numbering and Reports.

To create a report containing the revision information: Show revision information in report 1. Click the Report icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Report dialog box.

2. Select the drawing_issue_rev from the report list and click the Create from all button.

44 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 357: Tekla Basic

3. Click the Show button to open the report.

4. Check that the revisions are shown correctly in the report drawing_issue_rev.xsr (Tekla Structures creates the report in the model folder).

See the picture below as an example of the drawing_issue_rev report. Revisions made to the G [3] drawing are marked with a red rectangle.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 45 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 358: Tekla Basic

Create Revision marks in Drawings We will create revision marks in the drawings to help locate the changes made to the model.

For more information about creating revision marks in drawings, see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings > Editing drawings reference > Create > Revision mark.

To create a revision mark in the G [1] drawing: Define revision mark appearance

1. Select the G [1] drawing in the drawing list and click the Update marks button to update all marks.

2. Open the selected drawing and check that the part mark of the column on grid line 1 in the GRID A view has changed.

3. Select Properties > Revision mark… from the menu to open the Revision mark properties dialog box.

4. Select the revision number 1 in the drop-down box next to the Mark field to obtain the corresponding revision information.

46 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 359: Tekla Basic

5. On the Appearance tab, select the Arrow type as shown below, change the Frame color of the revision mark to red and click OK.

1. Select Create > Revision mark > Arrow on right from the menu and pick a point to place the mark. For example, pick close to the column and its part mark on grid line 1 in the GRID A view.

Create revision mark in GA drawing

2. Double-click the revision mark to obtain its properties. Check that the contents of the revision mark is correct, and its appearance corresponds to the properties set in step5.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 47 Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 360: Tekla Basic

48 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Principles of Working with Drawings

Page 361: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 26, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 362: Tekla Basic
Page 363: Tekla Basic

Contents

11 Assembly and Single Part Drawings ......................................................................... 3

11.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model............................................................................3 11.2 Create Drawings Using Drawing Wizards..................................................................................4 11.3 Edit Drawing Properties ...........................................................................................................11 11.4 Create New Drawing Wizard ...................................................................................................21 11.5 Create Drawings Manually.......................................................................................................28 11.6 Edit Drawings Manually ...........................................................................................................29 11.7 Updating Assembly and Single-part Drawings.........................................................................32 11.8 Cloning Drawings ....................................................................................................................36

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 364: Tekla Basic
Page 365: Tekla Basic

11 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

We will introduce the creation of assembly and single-part drawings in Tekla Structures.

In this lesson

We will first create single-part and assembly drawings by using predefined drawing wizards (drawing wizards are an automatic way of creating single, assembly and multi-drawings).

We will then edit the drawing properties and create a new drawing wizard. The Drawing Wizard will use the edited drawing properties and the select filters that we defined in an earlier lesson. Then we will show how the same drawings can be created manually. We will also demonstrate how updating effects the drawings.

Revision control of all drawing types is presented in Lesson 10 Principles of working with drawings.

11.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model

Assembly and Single-Part Drawings Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of each of the individual steel parts in the model. Assembly drawings are workshop drawings, in which details of an assembly consisting of the steel parts are presented for fabrication.

All of the views in single-part or assembly drawings are current views of the members as they are in the model.

When the model contains any identical members, the drawing is a view of one of these members. The drawing, however, contains information about the quantity of all of the identical members. If the "host" member of the drawing is modified or deleted, it will get a new position mark at the next numbering. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign the original drawing to another member with the original position mark.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 366: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, for example, dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. Because the information in the drawings and reports comes directly from the model, you cannot delete any of the parts or bolts from the drawings. You are able to filter out parts and bolts in the drawings, or make them invisible.

You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the related drawings when you next carry out numbering.

For more information, see Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Basics.

11.2 Create Drawings Using Drawing Wizards

Once you have numbered the model, you can create assembly and single-part drawings from the model. Drawing wizards are the most effective way to create drawings in Tekla Structures.

Wizards automatically produce different types of drawings of different parts, such as beams, columns, and braces. You can use wizards to create single-part, assembly, or multi-drawings using the settings defined in the wizard files.

You can use the predefined wizard files, edit them, or create your own drawing wizards. The Wizard dialog box lists the available wizard files.

For more information on drawing wizards, see: Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Using drawing wizards

Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawings reference > File > Wizard…

Drawing wizards cannot be used to create cast unit (CU) drawings of concrete structures.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 367: Tekla Basic

Functionality of Drawing Wizards For each member type in the model, drawing wizards automatically perform the following steps: 1. Define the drawing type to be created (single, assembly or multi).

2. Define the drawing properties to be used.

3. With the given select filter, select the parts from which to create drawings.

4. Create drawings.

When you apply a wizard, you can choose whether the wizard creates drawings from all parts of the model, or just from the selected parts.

By creating wizards that match the select filters and drawing properties in the project you can automatically create all single and assembly drawings of the parts using the correct predefined properties.

Preconditions of using a drawing wizard:

• Numbering of the model must be up to date.

• The appropriate wizard file must exist.

• The saved drawing properties listed in the wizard file must exist.

• The saved select filters listed in the wizard file must exist.

Model members which will be selected by the select filter must exist.

Create Single-Part Drawings of Selected Parts We will now use a drawing wizard to create single-part drawings of selected steel beams and plates. 1. Open the BasicModelCombined. Create single-part

drawings of steel beams 2. Select the BEAM_STEEL from the drop down list of available Select filters.

3. Select the whole model with an area selection.

4. To view the creation of the drawings, open the drawing list by clicking the Open drawing list icon.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 368: Tekla Basic

5. Select File > Wizard… from the menu or click the Wizard icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Wizard dialog box.

6. Select Single Drawings on the Wizards tab.

7. Click the Create from selected button.

8. In the drawing list check that the single-part drawings with the title BEAM were created.

9. Open a few single-part drawings for viewing.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 369: Tekla Basic

Following the procedure above, now create the single part drawings of the plates. Create single-part drawings from plates 1. Select the PLATE select filter.

2. Select the whole model with an area selection.

3. Select Single Drawings on the Wizards tab in the wizard dialog box.

4. Click the Create from selected button.

5. In the drawings list check that the single-part drawings with the title PLATE were created.

6. Open a few single-part drawings for viewing.

Using the procedure outlined above, you could create single-part drawings from any other selected steel parts in the model (columns, braces, angles, etc.).

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 370: Tekla Basic

It is advisable to create all the single and assembly drawings with the wizard, even for a single part.

Tekla Structures displayes a Cancel dialog box during the creation drawings. Click OK in the dialog box to stop creating the drawings.

To create single-part drawings from all of the steel parts at once you can use the option Create from all.

Create Assembly Drawings of All Parts Next we will create assembly drawings of all of the parts by using another drawing wizard.

To create all of the assembly drawings: 1. Click the Wizard icon to open the Wizard dialog box. Create assembly

drawings

2. Select Assembly Drawings on the Wizards tab.

3. Click the Create from all button.

Use the Create from all button to create drawings from the whole model at once. Note that Tekla Structures will not create single-part drawings or assembly drawings from concrete parts.

4. In the drawings list check that the assembly drawings were created correctly (sort the

drawing list by Title).

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 371: Tekla Basic

5. Open a few assembly drawings (which are not named STANDARD) for viewing.

For parts that don't match with the drawing properties or filters listed in the wizard file, the predefine wizards creates drawings using STANDARD properties.

1. Select drawings with the title STANDARD in the drawing list. Select parts with

drawing title STANDARD 2. Click the Filter - Select parts button.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 372: Tekla Basic

The parts associated with the selected drawing are now highlighted in the model. You will find that e.g. that objects like braces are highlighted in the model (the default wizard does not have a request for bracing). 1. Select one vertical brace on gridline A. Open brace

drawing 2. Click the Display - All button to ensure that all drawings are shown in the list.

3. Click the Filter - By parts button.

The drawing list shows now only the assembly drawing created from the brace selected in the model. 4. Open the drawing

The brace drawing was created with standard properties and not properties defined for bracing.

A drawing wizard will not create a duplicate drawing for any member already having, e.g. a single-part or assembly drawing.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 373: Tekla Basic

11.3 Edit Drawing Properties We will now define specific drawing properties for both horizontal and vertical bracing and save the properties to be used later in the drawing wizard.

As an example we will open one vertical brace drawing for editing. Using this drawing we will save the properties for the horizontal bracing. We will then edit some more properties and save them for the vertical bracing.

We will edit dimensioning protection and part mark properties. To illustrate the effect of single fields, we will first remove the existing dimensions from the drawing.

The editing we will do are just examples of using the drawing properties. The final drawing you get depends on the environment you are using and may not be identical to this example.

Study the Online help for information on each of the separate fields available in the drawing properties. Help: Drawing > Dimensioning

Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties

Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by changing the drawing properties. These modifications remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change. You can also use saved drawing properties in wizards.

1. Right-click on the drawing and select Properties… to open the Assembly drawing

properties. Load properties no_dimension

2. Load the predefined properties no_dimensions.

3. Click Modify.

The drawing now appears without any dimensions and only the main view is visible.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 374: Tekla Basic

By default, Tekla Structures creates the additional views only if it is necessary in order to show the dimensions in the drawing.

However, for our purposes, we want to have both the front and top views in the brace drawings regardless of the dimensions that may be needed. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click the View… button Display both front

and top views 2. Choose the option on for the Front and Top views

3. Click Apply and then Modify

Now both the front and top views are displayed.

The first dimension we will add is the main part overall dimension. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Dimensioning… > Part

dimensions. Main part overall dimension

2. Select Once for Main part overall dimensions.

3. Click Apply and then Modify.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 375: Tekla Basic

The main part overall dimension appears.

We will next add the dimension between the extreme bolts. 1. On the Bolt dimensions tab select Assembly for Extreme bolts. Extreme bolts

2. Click Apply and Modify.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 376: Tekla Basic

The distance between the extreme bolts appears.

We then continue by dimensioning the main part cuts

To dimension the cuts in the main part: Main part shape

1. On the Part dimensions tab turn Main part shape: to On.

2. Click Apply and then Modify.

Help: Drawing > Dimensioning > Dimension planes

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 377: Tekla Basic

The dimensions of the cuts appear in absolute dimensions. This is due to the dimension type defined in the Assembly – Dimension properties tab. We will change the dimension type to relative. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Dimension… Change

dimension type from absolute to relative

2. Change the Dimension types / In X direction to relative (see fig below).

3. Click Apply and then Modify.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 378: Tekla Basic

The dimensions of main part cuts now appear as relative dimensions.

By commenting environment variable, XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS, out the shape dimensions would always be relative despite the option chosen in the Dimension properties dialog box.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 379: Tekla Basic

You can protect areas in drawings to prevent text or dimensions being placed there. This way you can e.g. prevent the part mark (1012 in the fig. above) overlapping with the dimension line.

Protection

In cases where Tekla Structures can not find a free place for an object the objects will overlap with each others despite the switches in the protection dialog box.

1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Protection.

2. Select the checkboxes shown below. These options define that Part marks may not overlap dimension lines.

3. Select the checkboxes shown below. These options define that dimension lines may not overlap parts.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 380: Tekla Basic

4. Click Apply and then Modify

We will now save the properties that we have applied so far for horizontal bracing. We will then continue to edit the drawing little and save the properties for vertical bracing.

For vertical bracing we want to see the secondary part bolt internal dimensions and change the part mark frame little. 1. Type bracing_H in the Name: field of Assembly drawing properties dialog box. Save as

properties for bracing_H 2. Type bracing_H_TR in the Save as field, click the Save as button

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 381: Tekla Basic

We will now add bolt dimensions to the vertical bracing. 1. On the Assembly - Dimensioning properties > Bolt dimensions tab select Internal for

Secondary part bolt internal dimensions. Secondary part bolt internal

2. Click Apply and then Modify.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 382: Tekla Basic

The bolt distance dimensions of the gusset plates appear.

We will next change the part mark frame to be rectangular. Change the frame of part marks

On the Assembly - part mark properties / General tab: 1. Change the Frame around mark to rectangular.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 383: Tekla Basic

2. Click Apply and then Modify

The frames of part mark change to rectangular.

1. Type bracing_V in the Name: field of Assembly drawing properties dialog box. Save as

properties for bracing_V 2. Type bracing_V_TR in the Save as field, click the Save as button

11.4 Create New Drawing Wizard We will next create a new drawing wizard that matches the select filters created earlier and the available drawing properties. We will add two new drawing requests to create horizontal and vertical braces and use the new properties defined for them. We will also save the properties for those parts that don't match our wizard to be shown as INCOMPLETE in the drawing list.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 384: Tekla Basic

1. Load standard drawing properties. Create properties INCOMPLETE

2. Edit the Name: field to INCOMPLETE.

3. Save as the properties with name INCOMPLETE.

We will now use an existing wizard as the basis for constructing our own wizard.

To create a new drawing wizard, we will perform the following steps: 1. Open an existing wizard file.

2. Save it with another name.

3. Modify the new file.

4. Test the functionality of the new wizard.

The following links present more information on customizing the wizard settings and the contents of a wizard file. Help: System > Files and folders > Customizing Tekla Structures > Creating wizard files

Help: System > Files and folders > Log files > Wizard log

To create the new wizard file: 1. Click the Wizard icon to open the Wizard dialog box. Open existing

wizard file

2. Select Assembly Drawings on the Wizards tab.

3. Click Edit to open the wizard file in a text editor.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 385: Tekla Basic

1. Select Save as… from the File menu of the text editor to save the wizard file with another name.

Save wizard file with another name

2. Browse to the attributes folder under your model folder, enter ASSEMBLY_TR.dproc as the file name and click Save. Note that the file extension has to be .dproc.

3. Check that the ASSEMBLY_TR.dproc file was created in the attributes subfolder by selecting Open model folder from the Tools menu.

The predefined wizard files are located in the ..\countries\*environment*\system folder. In the system folder the wizard files are available for use in all models. Modified and saved wizard files are saved in the same folder, unless you define another destination folder (such as the model folder).

To have the new wizard file shown in the Wizard dialog box, you need to close and reopen the model.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 386: Tekla Basic

1. Open the Wizard dialog box. Modify wizard file

2. Select ASSEMBLY_TR on the Wizards tab and click Edit.

3. Select an existing drawing request for purlins (shown highlighted below) and copy it two times under the original request.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 387: Tekla Basic

4. Edit the requests that you copied, to match the criteria for vertical and horizontal bracing shown highlighted in yellow below.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 388: Tekla Basic

5. Delete the requests that don't match our select filters: Delete requests

• trusses

• ladders

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 389: Tekla Basic

Next we will change all the requests to use the select filters that we defined earlier, for this project. 6. Change the select filters defined for steel parts in this project: Change the select

filters • column_filter to COLUMN_STEEL

• beam_filter to BEAM_STEEL

• purlin_filter to PURLIN

• etc.

7. Edit the last request to be as shown: Request for the rest of the assembly drawings

/* Create rest of assembly drawings */ set_drawing_type(assembly) set_drawing_attributes(INCOMPLETE) set_filter(standard) create_drawings() 8. Click Save to save the changes and to close the text editor. Save the wizard

file

A wizard file is comprised of several sets of drawing requests. The order of these requests is important, since Tekla Structures creates only one drawing for each selected object. The first request that matches the criteria of select filters is applied.

Now we want to ensure that the new wizard file functions correctly. 1. Delete all of the assembly drawings in the drawing list. Apply own wizard

file 2. Open the Wizard dialog box, select the ASSEMBLY_TR wizard and click Create from

all.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 27 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 390: Tekla Basic

3. Check the drawing list to see that correct drawing properties were used:

• The titles of the created assembly drawings

• INCOMPLETE

• bracing_V, bracing_H

11.5 Create Drawings Manually In Tekla Structures, you can create single-part and assembly drawings by loading and applying predefined drawing properties for layout, dimensions, marks, etc. for selected parts. This process is called the manual creation of drawings, in contrast to the drawing creation with wizards.

The steps for the manual creation of drawings are basically the same as the steps used by the drawing wizard: 1. Select the model objects.

2. Load the predefined drawing properties.

3. Click Drawing > Assembly drawing to create assembly drawings or Drawing > Single-part drawing to create single-part drawings.

Create Assembly Drawings As example, we will create assembly drawings from the columns.

To manually create assembly drawings from all columns:

Open the drawing list and delete all assembly drawings with the title COLUMN. Delete column assembly drawings Create assembly drawings from columns

1. Select the column_filter on the Select switches toolbar and select the whole model.

2. Select Properties > Assembly drawing… in the menu to open the Assembly drawing properties dialog box.

3. Select column properties in the drop-down box next to the Load button.

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 391: Tekla Basic

4. Click Load and OK.

5. Select Drawing > Assembly drawing in the menu to create the assembly drawings.

6. Open the drawing list and check that the correct drawings were created.

You can also use the view filters in the View filter dialog box (opened from the View properties dialog box) to help selecting members in the model for drawing creation.

11.6 Edit Drawings Manually It is possible to manually add and edit additional drawing objects (i.e. dimensions, lines, text, symbols, graphics and marks) in Tekla Structures drawings.

Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by editing only the drawing properties. For example, if you use the drawing properties to modify the drawing, the modifications remain if the drawing must be recreated due to a model change.

We will now edit a brace_H drawing manually to include same editing that we defined for vertical brace_V drawing properties (the bolt distance dimensions and the rectangular part mark frame). 1. Open the first bracing_H drawing in the drawing list. Add bolt distance

dimensions 2. Click Create Y dimension icon.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 29 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 392: Tekla Basic

3. Pick the center points of bolts to be dimensioned.

4. Move the cursor to where you want the dimension to appear and click the middle button.

To move the dimension: Select it and drag it to the desired position.

Add the bolt dimension to the other end the same way. 1. Double-click one of the part marks to open Part mark properties dialog box. Change the frame

of part marks 2. On General tab change the Frame around mark to rectangular and tick only this check

box.

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 393: Tekla Basic

3. Select all the part marks in the drawing.

4. Modify.

Now all the part marks in the drawing have rectangular frames.

5. Close the drawing, click Save in the confirmation dialog box.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 31 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 394: Tekla Basic

1. Open the second bracing_H drawing. Edit the other bracing_H drawing 2. Add the bolt distance dimensions.

3. Change the frame of part marks to rectangular.

4. Close the drawing, click Save and Freeze in the confirmation dialog box

An F appears in the drawing list to show this drawing is frozen.

Now the drawings of the horizontal bracing have the same editing as the vertical bracing. The difference is that part of the horizontal brace editing was done manually.

11.7 Updating Assembly and Single-part Drawings We will now modify our model by changing the bolt spacing of all of the gusset plate connections. Changes in the model will result in some of the drawings will no longer be up-to-date. To be able to open the drawings you will need to run numbering and update them.

We will study how updating effects the edited drawings.

Updating will:

• Regenerate any drawings with a P flag that are unfrozen, the updating deletes all the manual editing (added dimensions, texts etc.).

• Update the quantities on a drawing with an N flag.

• Switch the P flag on a frozen drawing to an *. This indicates that the picture (the parts and bolts) and the marks of the member have been updated but not the dimensions.

Changes in the Model 1. Select all the connections in the model. Change gusset

plate bolt spacing 2. From the page 4 connection toolbar, double-click the Tube gusset (20) icon.

3. Check that the Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box.

4. In the Tubebolts1, Tubebolts2 and Tubebolts3 tab pages edit the vertical bolt spacing to 80 as shown below.

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 395: Tekla Basic

5. Click Modify.

Now the model has changed and some of the drawings are no longer up to date. To be able to open the drawings you need to run numbering and update them.

Select Tools > Numbering > Modified. Run numbering

Once the numbering is carried out the flags in the Drawings list shows all of the affected drawings that need to be updated. Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing status flags

The vertical brace drawings were created with only the predefined drawing attributes. They will be complete right after updating, since they are simply recreated using their own attributes.

Update vertical brace drawings

To update drawings: 1. Select the bracing_V drawings from the list.

2. Click Update.

3. Open the drawings to see that they are ok.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 33 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 396: Tekla Basic

Since the drawing is not frozen the updating regenerates the drawing but deletes all the manual editing (in this case the added bolt dimensions and part mark frame change).

Update not frozen horizontal brace drawing

There is no Undo for the updating the drawings command.

1. Select the bracing_H drawing that is not frozen.

2. Click Update.

3. Open the drawing

You can see the manually added dimension has disappeared and the part mark frame is back to rounded.

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 397: Tekla Basic

Updating a frozen drawing updates the picture of the member and the marks, but not the dimensions or manual editing. We will need to fix up any dimensions that need updating.

The fact that a lot of time can be spent editing drawings, it is advisable to always freeze manually edited drawings. If major modifications in the model create problems with a drawing you can always recreate the drawing with the automatic settings.

To update frozen drawings: Update frozen horizontal braze drawing 1. Select the frozen bracing_H drawing from the list.

2. Click Update.

3. The P gets replaced by an *.

4. Open drawing with an *.

You can see that the bolt dimension still appears but is not correct.

Updating a frozen drawing can lead to a situation of incomplete or erroneous dimensioning. You must manually complete or edit the dimensioning.

5. Select the dimension line and click the Add / remove dimension point icon.

6. Pick the correct points (the center points of bolts) to dimension.

7. Click Add / remove dimension point icon.

8. Use Shift and pick the wrong dimension points to remove them.

The dimension is now correct.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 35 Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 398: Tekla Basic

9. Save the drawing and the * flag will be removed.

You can filter up-to-date drawings with Filter > Up to date button. To get non up to date drawings listed press Display > Invert button after Filter > Up to date.

It is not possible to open earlier revisions of the drawings. Due to the integration between drawings and the model a drawing that is not up-to-date cannot be opened.

11.8 Cloning Drawings For more information, see Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Working with drawings > Cloning drawings.

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Page 399: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 26, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 400: Tekla Basic
Page 401: Tekla Basic

Contents

12 Cast Unit Drawings...................................................................................................... 3

12.1 Create Cast Unit Drawings ........................................................................................................3

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Cast Unit Drawings

Page 402: Tekla Basic
Page 403: Tekla Basic

12 Cast Unit Drawings

In this lesson we will learn how to create cast unit drawings of the concrete members of the model. We will then modify the drawings and use the finished drawings for cloning.

In this lesson

You will learn how to:

• Use your own Select filters

• Define cast unit drawing properties

• Define Drawing Classifier settings

• Use the Drawing Classifier

• Use different drawings of the same cast unit

• Use cloning

• Use the drawing list

12.1 Create Cast Unit Drawings Cast unit drawings are workshop (or in-situ) drawings, in which details of a cast unit, consisting of the concrete parts, reinforcement and components, are presented for fabrication.

All of the views in the drawings are current views of the members as they are in the model. When the model contains any identical members, the drawing is a view of one of these members. The drawing, however, contains information about the quantity of all of the identical members. If the "host" member of the drawing is modified or deleted, it will get a new position mark at the next numbering. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign the original drawing to another member with the original position mark.

Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, for example, dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. Because the information in the drawings and reports comes directly from the model, you cannot delete any of the parts or bolts from the drawings. You are able to filter out parts and other objects in the drawings, or make them invisible.

You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the related drawings when you next carry out numbering.

Once the model is numbered it is possible to create cast unit drawings of selected parts in the model. Selecting Cast Unit drawings from the Drawing pull-down menu will generate drawings of the selected parts. However, to get the drawings appear as complete as possible, it is a good idea to create drawings of certain cast units with suitable properties predefined for them.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Cast Unit Drawings

Page 404: Tekla Basic

There are two options for cast unit drawing specification. The possible options to select are By cast unit position or By cast unit ID. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Creating cast unit drawings.

Define Cast Unit Drawing Properties for Beams We will now define cast unit drawing properties for a beam, which has reinforcements included.

1. From the pull-down menu select Properties > Cast unit drawing... Set the common drawing properties

2. Select By cast unit position as the cast unit definition method.

3. Type BEAM REINFORCEMENT into the Name field. This text will appear in the drawing list.

We will next define drawings size, layout and view projection. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing layout > Drawing size and Drawing > Drawing layout > Scale and location of drawing views > Location of views in drawings. Look also at lesson 10 for layouts.

Set the layout properties

4. Press Layout… button.

5. Select Size definition mode to be Autosize.

6. Select Calculated/fixed sizes in Autosize > Use option menu.

7. Select the Scale tab page.

8. Set Autoscale to No.

9. Select the Other tab page.

10. Select Projection type to be First angle (also referred to as European projection).

11. Set Yes to Side views beside main.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Cast Unit Drawings

Page 405: Tekla Basic

12. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

13. Close the dialog by pressing OK.

Next we will define which views will be created to the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing properties > Drawing view properties.

Set the view properties

1. Press View… button.

2. Turn back and bottom views off, all other views to on or auto.

3. Select theAttributes tab.Set Scale to 1:20. All views of a view type share the same scale.

5. Set Coordinate system to local.

6. Set rotation to 0 in all directions.

7. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

8. Close the dialog by pressing OK.

Next we will define how the parts will be represented in the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing properties > Drawing view properties.

Set the part properties

1. Press Part… button.

2. Set Part representation to Exact.

3. Set Hidden lines on and Center line and Reference lines off.

4. Select the Appearance tab.

5. For Visible lines, select color, which is weighted 0.3 mms. For all other lines, select line weight 0.1 mm.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Cast Unit Drawings

Page 406: Tekla Basic

Color weight is defined in plotter catalog: File > Catalog > Plotters > Modify… > Color table... See more in Tekla Structures Help: Printing > The plotter catalog > Color.

6. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

7. Close the dialog by pressing OK.

Next we will define how the parts will be dimensioned in the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Dimensioning.

Set the dimensioning properties

1. Press Dimensioning… button.

2. Set Number of views > Minimize and Combine dimensions > Options to No.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Cast Unit Drawings

Page 407: Tekla Basic

3. Select the Part dimensions tab page.

4. Set part dimensions as below:

5. Select the Position dimensions tab page.

6. Set Position to Main part.

7. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

8. Close the dialog by pressing OK.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Cast Unit Drawings

Page 408: Tekla Basic

Next we will define how the reinforcements will be represented in the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing properties > Reinforcement in drawings.

Set the reinforcing properties

1. Press Reinforcement… button.

2. Set the Visibility of all reinforcing bars to Visible.

3. Set the Representation to single line.

4. Set the Visibility of reinforcing bars in group to all.

5. Select the Bar appearance tab page.

6. Select color, which is weighted 0.3 mms. Color weight is defined in plotter catalog: File > Catalog > Plotters >Modify…> Color table... See more in Tekla Structures Help: Printing > The plotter catalog > Color. We will first represent all reinforcements with same color and modify it later.

7. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

8. Close the dialog by pressing OK.

9. All other object can use standard settings. Now save these settings. Enter the name Beam-Reinforcement in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. Apply all setting and close the dialog by pressing OK.

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Cast Unit Drawings

Page 409: Tekla Basic

Create a Cast Unit Drawings for a Beam We will first create one cast unit drawing for a beam, which has reinforcements included, using the predefined attribute values. Then we will edit the settings and use them in new drawings for other beams with the help of Drawing Classifier.

1. Select a beam on grid line 1, between lines E and F. Create a cast unit drawing

2. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing from drop-down menu. A cast unit drawing is created of the selected beam using the predefined attribute values and it appears in the drawing list, which can be opened from Drawing > List… See more about drawing list in Tekla Structures Help: Drawings > Getting started with drawings > Drawing list and Lesson 10.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Cast Unit Drawings

Page 410: Tekla Basic

Select the drawing from the list and press Open button. Tekla Structures opens the Beam reinforcement drawing for editing. You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels:

Open the cast unit drawing for editing

• Drawing properties

• View properties

• Object properties

For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see Tekla Structures help:

Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Three levels of editing drawings

Help: Drawing > Drawing properties and Lesson 10.

Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by editing only the drawing properties. Then the modifications remain if the drawing must be recreated due to a model change.

Drawing Classifier in Beam Cast Unit Drawings

Define Drawing Classifier Settings We will use Drawing Classifier to represent the different reinforcements with different line settings. As a default all reinforcements use the same line settings and for clearer representation it is good to show different reinforcement with different line styles and weights.

The Classifier makes use of the Drawing and View Filter, the Drawing and View Properties and Property Attribute sub dialogs. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties > The drawing classifier > Using the classifier.

To change properties on a single view of a multiple view drawing, edit and save View properties rather than Drawing properties. Once the properties have been set up and saved they can be applied during automatic drawing creation in the normal ways.

We will first define the filter settings for different reinforcements. Tekla Structures uses filters for selecting objects in drawing views with certain criteria.

Create view filters

1. Double click any view border to open the View properties dialog.

2. Click the Filter... button to open the View filter properties dialog box.

3. Select the Reinforcing bars tab page.

4. Write BOTTOM_BAR TOP_BAR to the Reinforcing bar Name field. Note that there is an empty space between the names to separate them.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Cast Unit Drawings

Page 411: Tekla Basic

5. Save the filter settings with name Main_Bars in the Save as field.

6. Write then PNL to the Reinforcing bar Name field.

7. Enter the name Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

8. Next write STIRRUP to the Reinforcing bar Name field.

9. Enter the name Stirrups in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

10. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Do not click Apply or OK, as this will apply the current filter to the entire drawing and the Classifier will not work. We have now defined three different filters for different kind of reinforcements.

Next we will define the appearance settings for the reinforcements. Define reinforcement appearance 1. Click the Reinforcement... button to open the View reinforcing bar properties dialog

box.

2. Select the Bar appearance tab page.

3. Select color, which is weighted 0.5 mms.

4. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Main_Bars in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for main bars.

The name consists of three sections. First there must be text "filter", then the drawing or view attribute file name – in this case "Beam-Reinforcement" – (the saved settings of drawing or view main dialog), last section is the name of the filter attribute file – in this case "Main_Bars". The sections are combined with "_" mark.

5. Next select the Bar content tab page.

6. Select filled line as the Representation type.

7. Select straight line as symbol at reinforcement ends.

8. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for main bars.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Cast Unit Drawings

Page 412: Tekla Basic

9. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. We have now drawing classifier settings for main reinforcements and lifting hooks, stirrups can use Beam-Reinforcement settings.

Before modifying the drawing, we will add drawing classifier settings for pullout pictures of stirrup reinforcement marks.

Define reinforcement mark content

1. Click the Reinforcement marks… button to open the View reinforcing bar mark properties dialog box.

2. Select the Pullout picture from Available elements list on Single mark tab page.

3. Press the Add> button. Pullout picture dialog opens.

4. Tick the Dimensions and Bending angle, then press OK.

5. Select then Group above the Elements in mark list.

6. Repeat steps 2 – 4 to add the Pullout picture for reinforcement group mark.

7. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Stirrups in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for stirrup reinforcements.

8. Then remove all elements from Elements in mark list.

9. Select Name from Available elements list and press Add> button.

10. Select Diameter from Available elements list and press Add> button.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Cast Unit Drawings

Page 413: Tekla Basic

11. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for lifting hooks.

12. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Use Drawing Classifier to Edit the Drawing Now all drawing classifier settings are ready for use. We will first modify the drawing, which is already open.

1. Close all view dialogs by clicking Cancel. Modify the drawing

2. Double click at any empty space to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog.

3. Press Modify. Tekla Structures edits the picture using drawing classifier settings.

Main reinforcement bars are now represented with line weighted 0.5 mms, lifting hooks with filled line having name + diameter in the mark, and stirrups have a pullout picture in the mark.

4. Now close the drawing saving it.

Use the Drawing Classifier to Create New Drawings Next we will create new drawings of rest of the concrete beams with the same Drawing Classifier settings.

1. Select Properties > Cast unit drawing… to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog.

2. Select Beam_Reinforcement drawing settings from pull-down menu list.

3. Press Load button.

4. Press OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog.

5. Select BEAM_CONCRETE select filter.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Cast Unit Drawings

Page 414: Tekla Basic

6. Make an area select of the whole model. All concrete beams will be selected.

7. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing. Tekla Structures generates cast unit drawings of the selected beams using drawing classifier settings for reinforced beams and they appear in the drawing list with title BEAM REINFORCEMENT.

Define Cast Unit Drawing Properties for Columns Using the settings for beam cast unit drawing as basis, we will next define drawing settings for columns and generate cast unit drawings of them.

1. Select Properties > Cast unit drawing… from drop-down menu to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog.

2. Select the Beam-Reinforcement from saved attributes list and press Load.

3. Change the name field to COLUMN REINFORCEMENT.

4. Enter the name Column-Reinforcement in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

Next we add elevation dimensioning to dimensioning settings. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Dimensioning.

Set the dimensioning attributes

1. Press Dimensioning… button.

2. Select the Beam from saved attributes list and press Load.

3. Select the Position dimensions tab page.

4. Set the Elevation dimensions to On.

5. Enter the name Column-Reinforcement in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

6. Close the dialog by pressing OK.

7. All other object can use standard or Beam-reinforcement settings. Now save these settings by pressing Save as in the main dialog. Apply all setting and close the dialog by pressing OK.

Create Cast Unit Drawings for Columns 1. We will first create one cast unit drawing for a column, which has reinforcements

included, using the predefined attribute values. Then we will modify the settings and use them in new drawings for other beams with the help of drawing classifier.

2. Select a column on grid lines 1 and C intersection.

3. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing from drop-down menu. A cast unit drawing is created of the selected column.

We will next modify the Drawing Classifier settings for columns: Modify the Drawing Classifier settings 1. Open the column cast unit drawing.

2. Double click at any view border to open the View properties dialog box.

3. Open the Reinforcement properties dialog by pressing Reinforcement…

4. Select filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Main_Bars from pull-down list and press the Load button.

5. Enter the name filter_Column-Reinforcement_Main_Bars in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Cast Unit Drawings

Page 415: Tekla Basic

6. Then load the settings of filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Lifting_Hooks.

7. Enter the name filter_Column-Reinforcement_ Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

8. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

We will next add part mark settings for column shoes. First we need to define the filter for components.

1. In View properties dialog, press Filter…

2. As all parts inside the components have class number 100, we can use that for filtering. Enter 100 into Class field on Parts tab page.

3. Enter the name component in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

4. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

5. Next we will define part mark settings for Drawing Classifier, using the component filter.

6. In View properties dialog, press Part mark…

7. Remove all elements from Elements in mark list, both for main part and secondary part.

8. Enter the name filter_Column-Reinforcement_component in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

9. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

10. Double click at any empty space to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog.

11. Press Modify. Tekla Structures edits the picture using drawing classifier settings.

12. Close the drawing and save it.

We will now create cast unit drawings for all concrete columns with the drawing classifier settings.

Use Drawing Classifier to create new drawings 1. Select COLUMN_CONCRETE select filter.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Cast Unit Drawings

Page 416: Tekla Basic

2. Make an area select of the whole model. All concrete columns will be selected.

3. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing. Tekla Structures generates cast unit drawings of the selected beams using drawing classifier settings for reinforced beams and they appear in the drawing list with title COLUMN REINFORCEMENT.

Create Additional Cast Unit Drawings You can create two or more cast unit drawings from the same cast unit. Drawing might be produced as three separate smaller size drawings i.e. One including main geometry + embeddings + dimension lines, one having Reinforcement, another Surface finishing (tiles etc.).

Alternatively, you can add several new views from the same cast unit to an existing drawing using Create > View > Basic > Front, Up, Back or Down commands.

First we need to define the drawing settings. Set the drawing attributes

1. Select Properties > Cast unit drawing… from drop-down menu to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog.

2. Select the Column-Reinforcement from saved attributes list and press Load.

3. Change the name field to COLUMN DIMENSIONS.

4. Enter number 2 to the Sheet number field.

Every additional cast unit drawing of the same cast unit must have a different sheet number.

5. Enter the name Column-Dimensions in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

6. Press Reinforcement… button.

7. Set the visibility of reinforcing bars to Not visible.

8. Enter the name Column-Dimensions in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

9. Close the dialog by pressing OK.

10. Now save these settings by pressing Save as in the main dialog. Apply all setting and close the dialog by pressing OK.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Cast Unit Drawings

Page 417: Tekla Basic

We will now create a dimensioning drawing of one column. Generate an additional cast unit drawing 1. Select a column on grid lines 1 and C intersection.

2. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing from drop-down menu. A cast unit drawing is created of the selected column. The drawing appears in the drawing list with title COLUMN DIMENSIONS. The drawing name has a new sheet number.

We will next edit the dimensioning drawing and add there also details for connecting parts. For this create basic views of them by selecting part and right-click > Create view > Part basic views.

Edit the additional cast unit drawing

1. Open the cast unit drawing.

2. We will first add running dimensions for corbel. Double click the Create x dimension icon to open the dialog.

3. Select straight dimensioning to option, which has running dimensions.

4. On Appearance tab select arrow shape to be filled arrow.

5. Press OK.

6. Click the corner points of the column and the corbel, end with middle button.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Cast Unit Drawings

Page 418: Tekla Basic

7. Next add part mark for bearing pad.

8. Select the bearing pad.

9. Right-click > Part mark.

10. Double click the part mark to open the Part mark properties dialog.

11. Remove all elements from Elements in mark list.

12. Add Name and Material to Elements in mark list.

13. Select the elements and press <Add frame.

14. Press Modify.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Cast Unit Drawings

Page 419: Tekla Basic

15. We will now add part basic views to the drawing to show the connecting structures.

16. In Create pulldown menu select View > From model > View.

17. Select the Part end view of the pad footing. Tekla Structures generates a new view to the drawing.

18. Right click at any empty space and select Place views command. The views are rearranged in the drawing.

19. Remove unnecessary part marks from the view by selecting them and by pressing Delete button.

20. Double click the view border and select Part.

21. Set hidden lines visible and press Modify.

22. Add needed dimensions using dimensioning tools.

23. Close the drawing saving it.

Cloning Drawings We will next clone the additional cast unit drawing for columns on grid line F. You can clone drawings to produce cast unit drawings of same or similar cast units.

You should consider cloning drawings when:

1. There are several almost similar parts or cast units in the model.

2. You need to produce several cast unit drawings of same cast unit.

3. The drawings need a lot of manual editing.

See more about cloning in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing reference > Drawing>Clone drawing.

Steps to clone drawings:

1. Finalize, save, and close the drawing you want to clone.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Cast Unit Drawings

Page 420: Tekla Basic

2. In the model, select cast units to include in the drawing.

3. Click Drawing > List... to open the drawing list.

4. Select the finalized drawing on the drawing list.

5. Click Clone...

6. In the Drawing cloning dialog box, select the drawing objects in the finalized drawing that you want to copy into the new drawing. If you want Tekla Structures to red circle the dimensions for which it cannot find a reference point on a part, select the Indicate dimension points that need checking checkbox.

7. Click Clone selected.

Always check dimensions and drawing view sizes in cloned drawings.

You can have Tekla Structures to indicate the dimension points that need to be checked. Select the checkbox Indicate dimension points that need checking in the Drawing cloning dialog box. Tekla Structures circles in red the dimensions for which it cannot find a reference point on a part. To remove the red circles in cloned drawings, do one of the following:

• To remove one circle, in the Drawing Editor, click Edit > Remove dimension point circle > Single circle and select the circle to remove.

• To remove all circles, click Edit > Remove dimension point circle > All.

Create a new dimension point (Edit > Add dimension point) at the correct position and delete the existing dimension point (Edit > Remove dimension point).

When you delete incorrect dimensions the red circles will also disappear. You can then recreate the dimensions.

In order to add and remove dimension points and to remove dimension point circles, you may have to adjust the drawing view size so that the dimension points are inside the view.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Cast Unit Drawings

Page 421: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 26, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 422: Tekla Basic
Page 423: Tekla Basic

Contents

13 GA Drawing .................................................................................................................. 3

13.1 General about GA Drawings......................................................................................................3 13.2 Creating GA Drawings ...............................................................................................................3 13.3 Editing GA Drawings................................................................................................................21 13.4 Updating GA Drawings ............................................................................................................25

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i GA Drawing

Page 424: Tekla Basic
Page 425: Tekla Basic

13 GA Drawing

We will look more closely at the features of general arrangement (GA) drawings in Tekla Structures. We will create GA drawings, modify and update them. We will also introduce tools for adding details and section views to the drawings.

In this lesson

13.1 General about GA Drawings A general introduction to GA drawings and an example of creating GA drawings is presented in the Lesson 10 Principles of working with drawings. Also see the help file for more information Help: Drawing > Getting Started with Drawings > General arrangement drawings...

13.2 Creating GA Drawings We will now create general arrangement drawings from the following Basic model 1-2 views:

• 3D view

• Elevation views from grids A, F, 1, 4, 7

• Foundation plan

• And add a few details to the GA drawing

Adjust Model Views for GA Drawings Before we start linking model views to GA drawing we need to review the views and if necessary modify or create new model views:

1. Open the 3D view. Modify 3d view

2. Double click in the view background and click the Filter… button in the View properties dialog.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 GA Drawing

Page 426: Tekla Basic

3. Filter out profiles D64*, P18*, 175* -> click Modify.

4. Rotate the 3D view to you liking (Ctrl + middle mouse button).

3D view will come to GA drawing in same rotation angle as it is in the model view.

5. Close the view.

6. Check that other model views (grid A, F, 1, 4, 7 and plan 0) are displaying the necessary information:

• Filter unnecessary parts out.

• Restrict work area to show only the part of the model you want visible (fit work area / pick work area).

• Rotate 3D views to your liking.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 427: Tekla Basic

• Make sure that the plan and elevation views are in 2D mode.

E.g. Foundation plane (view Plan 0).

E.g. Elevation at grid line 4.

Create Detail Model Views We can add any existing view to a GA drawing. We will now create detail views from two connections:

Create connection basic views

1. Highlight the connection symbols at grid intersection of A/4 at the +13400 elevation.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 GA Drawing

Page 428: Tekla Basic

2. Right click and select: Create view > Component Basic view.

3. Filter out concrete parts from the view.

4. Rotate the 3D view so that you get the best view of the connections.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 429: Tekla Basic

5. Double click the background of the basic view and change the name of the view to (e.g. grid line location) Connection A/4 @ Roof level.

6. Click Modify.

7. The view title bar is changed according to the name (Connection A/4 @ Roof level). You should also see this view in the Open named view list.

Create a similar detail view from the connection at grid intersection B/4 at the Roof level.

Setup GA Drawing Properties Before we can start creating GA drawings we need to setup the drawing properties. See the online help files for more details.

Set drawing properties

Help: Drawing > Getting started with Drawings > Drawing reference > General arrangement drawing...

1. Select Drawing > General arrangement drawing…

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 GA Drawing

Page 430: Tekla Basic

2. In the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box click Drawing properties…

3. Change the following attributes for the 3D GA drawing:

• Change name to 3D (Name field)

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 431: Tekla Basic

• View scale to 1:100 (View… button)

• Turn off grid lines (Grid… button)

• Turn off center lines (Part… button)

• Turn off welds (Weld… button)

4. Click OK in each child dialog box to lock the settings. And then click OK to in the main GA drawing properties dialog to lock all the settings.

Create GA Drawing from One Model View We will create a general arrangement drawing from the 3D model view using the drawing properties set in a previous chapter.

1. Select 3d view from the Create general arrangement drawing dialog. Create drawing out of 3D view

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 GA Drawing

Page 432: Tekla Basic

2. Check mark Open Drawing.

3. Click Create.

In few moments Tekla Structures opens a drawing created from the 3D view.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 433: Tekla Basic

Create GA Drawing Using More Than One Model View Now we will create another GA drawing using more than one model view and automatically bring those views into the GA drawing.

1. Click the Drawing properties… button in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog, and change the following:

Adjust drawing properties

• Change the name to Elevation @ Grid 4 (Name field)

• Change drawing size to 830*287 (Layout… dialog)

2. Click on OK for each of the dialogs to lock the settings.

To create GA drawing using more than one model view: Create drawing out of Grid view and detail 1. Highlight views GRID 4 and Connection A/4 @ Roof level.

2. Select All selected views to one drawing.

3. Check mark Open drawing.

4. Click Create.

In few moments Tekla Structures opens the GA drawing with the selected model views.

5. Double click the blue border of the main view. In the View properties dialog box, change the following:

• Turn on the grid lines (Grid… button)

• Set the part marks visibility to distributed (Part mark… > General)

• Turn off the part marks out of the view plane (Part mark… -> General)

6. Double click the blue border of the detail and change the following:

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 GA Drawing

Page 434: Tekla Basic

• Change the scale to 1:20 (Scale field)

• Change the bolt mark visibility to distributed (Bolt part… -> General)

7. Close the drawing.

If part or bolt mark visibility properties are set to something other than None and another view is added to drawing, all the deleted part marks will reappear.

Add Another Model View to Existing GA Drawing We will now create another detail for the Grid 4 drawing using the same view properties as the existing detail.

1. Open a model view at the connection at B/4 @ Roof level. Link another model view to GA drawing 2. Open GA drawing Elevation @ Grid 4.

3. Double click the Create view from model view icon to open the view properties.

4. Click Interrupt (right mouse click > Interrupt).

5. Highlight the border of existing detail.

6. Click Get on View properties dialog.

7. Click OK.

8. Activate the Create view from model view command again by clicking the icon.

9. Minimize the drawing.

10. Pick the Connection B/4 @ Roof level view.

11. Maximize the drawing and the detail will have appeared at the bottom left hand corner of the drawing.

12. Move the view from bottom left hand corner to a better location.

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 435: Tekla Basic

Create Detail from Drawing View Now we create one more detail for the Grid 4 drawing, so keep the drawing open.

1. Double click the Create view from view icon. Create another detail

2. In View properties dialog change the scale to 1/20.

3. Click OK.

4. Select an area near the footing at grid line A as shown below.

5. Detail should now appear on the drawing.

6. Right click and select Place views, or place the view manually.

7. Close the drawing.

If existing drawing view is in a 3D view then picking of the area is difficult. Usually, it is easier to create another view in the model and link that model view to a drawing as explained earlier.

Create Multiple GA Drawings Automatically Now we will create multiple general arrangement drawings automatically using grid views A, F, 1 and 4.

1. Click the Drawing properties… button in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog and change the following:

Change drawing properties

• Change the name to Elevation @ Grid (Name field)

• Turn on grid lines (Grid… button)

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 GA Drawing

Page 436: Tekla Basic

2. Click OK for each of the dialogs to lock the settings.

To create multiple GA drawings out of multiple model views: Create GA drawings out of Grid views 1. Highlight views GRID A, GRID F, GRID 1 and GRID 7.

2. From the list box, select One drawing per view.

3. Click Create.

You will get 4 GA drawings.

We still need to modify the GA drawing names.

1. Open the first drawing on the list.

2. Check the view title to see which grid line it represents.

3. Double click the background of the drawing to open drawing properties.

4. Change the name to e.g. Elevation @ Grid F.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 437: Tekla Basic

5. Click Modify and the name changes on the list.

6. Repeat for the rest of the drawings.

Create Empty GA Drawing and Add Model Views Interactively In certain situations (multi-user for example) it is necessary to first create empty GA drawings and later link the model views interactively. By using this method each user can have GA drawings reserved for their use.

1. Click the Drawing properties… button on Create general arrangement drawing dialog, and change the following:

Change drawing properties

• Change the name to Foundation (Name field)

• Change the drawing size to 830*584 (Layout… dialog)

• Set the part marks visibility to none (Part mark… -> General)

• Set the part marks out of view plane not visible(Part mark… -> General)

2. Click the OK button for each of the dialogs to lock the settings.

To create an empty GA drawing and add the model view interactively: Create empty GA drawing

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 GA Drawing

Page 438: Tekla Basic

1. Open the model view, Plan +0.

2. Open the GA drawing creation dialog, Drawing > Create general arrangement drawing.

3. Select Empty drawing from the drop down menu.

4. Check mark Open drawing.

5. Click Create.

1. Open the drawing. Link model view to drawing

2. Minimize the drawing.

3. Double click the Create view from model view icon.

4. Change the scale to 1/100.

5. Click OK.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 439: Tekla Basic

6. Pick the model view.

7. Maximize the drawing and the model view has been placed on the drawing.

8. Right click and select Place views.

Create Detail Using Area Select We will now create detail from the footing at A/1.

1. Minimize the drawing again. Create detail

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 GA Drawing

Page 440: Tekla Basic

2. Double click the icon Create view from model by area.

3. Change scale to 1/20.

4. Click OK.

5. Pick area around the footing at grid intersection A/1.

6. Maximize the drawing and the view will have been placed on the drawing.

7. Right click and select Place views.

Create Section View Out of the Detail Now we will create section view from the footing detail that we created earlier.

1. Double click the icon Create section view. Create section view

2. Change scale to 1/20 in the view properties dialog.

3. Click OK.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 441: Tekla Basic

4. Pick the section view area as shown below:

• With points 1 and 2 you will show the location and direction of the cut line. • Then with points 3 and 4 you will show the depth and width of the section view, so

a pick box which is big enough that all of the necessary parts fit inside.

The section view and cut symbols will appear.

The section view height is same as model height.

1. Double click the section view blue border.

2. Change the height by changing the y max: value from 13400 to 500.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 GA Drawing

Page 442: Tekla Basic

3. Click Modify.

4. Left click the background of the drawing once and then right click and select Place views.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 443: Tekla Basic

13.3 Editing GA Drawings Next we will do some editing to the GA drawings. Most of the editing is done exactly like it is done in other types of drawings see: Help: Drawing > Editing Drawings.

Interactive Dimensioning For more information about the different dimensioning tools, see: Help: Drawing > Dimensioning > Manual dimensioning.

Automatic Grid Dimensions Grids can be dimensioned with just couple of clicks:

5. Open the Foundation GA drawing. Dimension grids

6. Go to Create > Dimension > Grid.

7. Pick the main drawing view.

8. Grid dimensions will appear.

9. You can pick and move dimension lines anywhere you want them.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 GA Drawing

Page 444: Tekla Basic

Semi-automatic GA Dimensioning See the online help file for more information about setting up dimensioning properties Help: Drawings > Dimensioning > Dimension reference > Setup > GA dimensioning.

1. From the menu select Setup > GA dimensioning… Dimension Silos

2. Set the properties as shown below:

3. Select the silos.

4. Right click and select Dimension Parts XY.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 445: Tekla Basic

5. Dimension lines from the silos to grid lines should appear.

In same fashion we can also dimension the anchor bolts:

1. Highlight the parts in anchor bolt detail. Dimension anchor bolt detail

2. Right click and select Dimension Parts XY.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 GA Drawing

Page 446: Tekla Basic

And in the section view:

3. Double click the blue border to open the view properties. Dimension anchor bolt cut view

4. Click the Part… button, check mark Hidden lines: to on and click Modify.

5. Highlight just the anchor bolts and the footing.

6. Right click and select Dimension Parts XY.

7. Close the drawing.

Creating a Level Mark Level mark can be inserted at any picked point in the drawings and it will automatically give you the elevation of that point.

1. Click the Create level mark icon. Create level mark

2. Right click and use the Near snap override pick a point at the top of the foundation.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation GA Drawing

Page 447: Tekla Basic

3. Free pick another point to set the direction of the level mark.

4. The level mark will appear at the selected location.

13.4 Updating GA Drawings GA drawings are automatically updated when you make changes to the model. However, GA drawing marks are not automatically updated. You need to update these by pressing the Update marks button in the drawing list before opening the drawing.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 GA Drawing

Page 448: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 26, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 449: Tekla Basic
Page 450: Tekla Basic

Contents

14 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering............................................................................ 3

14.1 Multi-drawings and Multinumbering in General..........................................................................3 14.2 Creating Multi-drawings .............................................................................................................6 14.3 Updating and revisions ............................................................................................................13 14.4 Multinumbering tutorial ............................................................................................................15

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 451: Tekla Basic
Page 452: Tekla Basic

14 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

We will learn about the creation and use of multi-drawings and explain the principles of multinumbering. We will also touch on the updating of multi-drawings and revision control.

In this chapter

14.1 Multi-drawings and Multinumbering in General

Multi-drawings are used to gather assembly and/or single part drawings onto a single sheet, below are some examples:

• You want all the assemblies on same size drawing sheet. Some assemblies might need a larger (A1 or 24X36) sheet, but others might require less space (A3 or 17X11). When using multi-drawings you can link as many assemblies as will fit on one larger sheet.

• Assembly or single part drawings can be also linked to multi-drawing with layout, and then each assembly can have its own Bill of Material.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 453: Tekla Basic

• You want all of the single part drawings of plates with the same thickness gathered onto one sheet.

• If you need to have the sheet number included as part of the assembly and/or part mark, you can use multinumbering. The only way to achieve this is to link the assembly and/or single part drawings to a multi-drawing.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 454: Tekla Basic

Multi-drawing Properties

Name: can be used to define the content of the drawing. The name field will be shown on the drawing list. For multinumbering the Name: field will correspond as the multi-drawing number and depending on the multinumber setup it will be added to assembly and/or part mark e.g. Name: 101 -> Assembly mark 101B1. To get information on common drawing properties see:

Help: Drawing properties > Common drawing properties

Options for Creating Multi-Drawing You can link or copy assembly/single part drawing views with or without layout to the multi-drawing. The difference between link and copy is that with copy the connection to original drawing is broken, where as with link the connection to original is kept.

1. You can create empty multi-drawings and then link or copy assembly or single part drawings interactively. This option is a little bit laborious but you can optimize the use of paper.

2. You can create multi-drawings automatically from selected assembly or single part drawings. Just select all the drawings you want, Tekla Structures will link as many assembly/single part drawings to one sheet as will fit and then create another multi-drawing and continue the linking procedure. This is an easy way of creating gather sheets.

3. It is also possible with one command to create assembly or single part drawings and then multi-drawings from these drawings. This option isn't recommended because you can't use specific settings for different types of parts.

4. The drawing Wizard can be also be used; the procedure is a mix of options 2 and 3. Everything is done automatically but with specific settings for different types of parts.

For more information, see: Help: Drawings > Multi-drawings > Properties.

Multinumbering Setup In a case where your fabricator wants multinumbers for assemblies and/or parts those drawings need to be linked to multi-drawings. Multinumbers are assigned according to the batch file settings.

The following lines in the batch file affect numbering:

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 455: Tekla Basic

rem set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= rem set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= rem set XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= rem set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= rem set XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR= rem set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS= rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= rem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS= rem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS= rem set XS_ALLOW_DRAWING_TO_MANY_MULTI_DRAWINGS= rem set XS_SWITCH_POS_NUMBERS_FOR= rem set XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING= rem set XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING= Using these variables we can get following types of multinumbers:

E.g. assemblies: A101, B101, C101, … 101A, 101B, 101C, … 101B1, 101B2, 101B3, 101C1, 101C2, … 1B101, 2B101, 3B101, 1C101, 2C101, … 101BA, 101BB, 101BC, 101CA, 101CB, … AB101, BB101, CB101, AC101, BC101, CC101, …

E.g. parts: a101, b101, c101, … 101a, 101b, 101c, … 101a1, 101a2, 101a3, 101p1, 101p2, … 1a101, 2a101, 3a101, 1p101, 2p101, … 101aa, 101ab, 101ac, 101pa, 101pb, … aa101, ab101, ac101, pa101, pb101, pc101, …

See end of the document for more details and setup instructions.

If you work for many fabricators and you need to define different numbering setups for each one you can create multiple batch files. Click the attached link for a Batch file tutorial.

Help: System > Files and Folders > Startup batch file

Don't change the numbering setup after linking assembly or single part drawings to multi-drawings. This will cause t

he loss of all drawings which have a multinumber assigned.

14.2 Creating Multi-drawings

training lesson 11 for more information about creating assembly and single part

u ry parts, you need to remember to include the single

part views in the assembly drawings.

We will create multi-drawings using methods 1 and 2 described under Options for creatingmulti-drawings. We will use assembly and single part drawings created in lesson 11. You can reviewdrawings.

If you need multinumbers you need to edit batch file and restart Tekla Structures. Also if yowant multinumbers applied to seconda

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 456: Tekla Basic

All the necessary editing should be done in the assembly or single part drawings. The multi-drawing is just intended for use as a gathering sheet.

Create Empty Multi-drawings and Link Assembly Drawings Manually 1. Set multi-drawing properties (Properties > Multi-drawing…). Create empty

multi drawing 2. Load TEKLA_multi setting from the top of the dialog. Lock the setting and close dialog

by clicking OK.

3. Create an empty multi-drawing (Drawing > Multi-drawing > Multi-drawing).

You should be able to see that there is new drawing on the list M, [1], Title 101.

1. Open the multi-drawing. Link assembly drawings to multi-drawings 2. Highlight the first 5 beam assembly drawings.

3. Hold the cursor over the highlighted drawings right-click and select Link drawing views.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 457: Tekla Basic

In the multi-drawing, you will see the 5 drawings being linked to the multi-drawing, one on top of the other. If you are using multinumbering you can see the assembly marks changing on the drawing list, according to your numbering setup e.g.101B1, 101B2 etc.

1. To arrange assemblies on the multidrawing, right click and select Place views. Place views on multi-drawing

2. To arrange the assemblies interactively:

• Select outer blue border around an assembly

• Left pick the border

• Drag the assembly to the desired location

Your multi-drawing should look something like the one shown below (obviously different assembly drawing settings affect the appearance).

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 458: Tekla Basic

1. Highlight the next assembly on the drawing list and repeat the linking procedure. Add more

assemblies to multi-drawing 2. After linking arrange the assemblies on the sheet again.

It seems that we can't fit all 6 drawings on one sheet. The Bill of Material (top right hand corner) will be expanded and interfere with the beam view when drawing is re-opened. We need to remove 1 assembly from the sheet. As long as the drawing has been open all the time you can unlink the assemblies by using undo.

Remove the extra assemblies from the multi-drawing

1. Click the undo button until the automatic and interactive arranging has been undone.

2. Click undo twice to undo the linking of one assembly, multinumbering is undone at the same time.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 459: Tekla Basic

After you have arranged a suitable number of assemblies on the sheet, you should close and then re-open the drawing.

Re-open drawing

1. Highlight drawing on the drawing list and click Open. 2. Click the Save button.

The bill of material is always updated when the drawing is opened.

Once you close and save the drawing the undo log is cleared and the multinumber is set for those parts. The only way to get rid of the multinumber afterwards is to clear the numbering from selected parts (Tools -> Numbering).

The assembly view title e.g. 1 ~ BEAM ~Marked 101B1 can be changed in the batch file:

set XS_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE=

Take a look at the Tekla Structure help file for more information.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 460: Tekla Basic

Repeat the procedure for the rest of the beam assembly drawings.

ulti-drawing > Multi-drawing). Note nged e.g. 101 > 102.

4. Link the assemblies to the multi-drawing.

1. Create a new empty multi-drawing (Drawing > Mthat the drawing name is automatically cha

2. Open the drawing.

3. Select the rest of the beam assembly drawings.

5. Arrange the assemblies.

6. Close and re-open the drawing to update the Bill of Material.

ic Mul ings

Multi-drawing >

Automat ti-drawing Creation from Selected Draw1. If necessary load TEKLA_multi, multi-drawing properties (Properties -> Multi-

drawing…).

2. Highlight the Column drawings from the drawing list.

3. Right click at the top of the selected drawings and select: Drawing > Selected drawings.

You should be able to see that Tekla Structures creates a new multi-drawing and then starts linking the assembly drawings to it. Once the first sheet is full, it creates a new multi-drawing and starts the linking procedure again until all of the selected assemblies are linked to multi-drawings.

Create multi-drawing for the rest of the beam drawings

Create multi-drawings out of the column drawings

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 461: Tekla Basic

At the same time you can see the assembly marks changing on the drawing list according to your numbering setup e.g.103C1, 103C2… 104C1 etc.

The number of multi-drawings needed depends on size of the assembly dralinking procedure is finished you can open the multi-drawings.

wings. After the

Hig he drawing list.

wing >

hlight the Brace drawings in t

1. Right click at the top of selected drawings and select: Drawing > Multi-draSelected drawings.

Hig gs in the drawing list.

clic drawing >

hlight the Plate drawin

1. RightSelected

k at the top of the selected drawings and select: Drawing > Multi- drawings.

The multinumber is assigned only once

, so if you assigned the multinumber during the linking of assembly drawings then the number should not be changed again.

lti-drawings out of the bracing drawings

drawings out of the single part plate drawings

Create multi-

Create mu

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 462: Tekla Basic

14.3 Updating and revisions For the most part updating and revision control is similar to that done in other drawings, so for more information take a look:

Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Defining drawing revisions

Lesson 10.8 Principles of drawings

But because of the linking procedure and multinumbers there are a few issues that need a closer look.

Updating Multi-drawing Changes to an assembly drawing are not automatically updated in the multi-drawing. Any saved modification to an assembly drawing requires the multi-drawing to be updated. This also means that if something changes in the model, which requires an assembly drawing to be updated, then it will also require the multi-drawing to be updated.

In the case where an assembly or single part mark changes so that a new drawing is cloned or needs to be created, the new drawing also needs to be linked to a multi-drawing.

If multinumbering is used modifications that affect numbering might also require re-linking of the assembly drawing. For example, if clip angles change so that they get a completely new number the assembly drawing needs to be deleted from multi-drawing. The assembly drawing must then be re-linked to the multi-drawing for the new clip angles to get multinumber.

Add a typical weld mark to an assembly drawing: Modifying an assembly drawing

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 463: Tekla Basic

Close and save the drawing.

You should see that there is "D" flag in front of the multi-drawing. This means that assembly or single part drawing that has been linked to the multi-drawings has been changed. You now need to update the multi-drawing.

Update multi-drawing

Highlight the drawing and click Update.

Open the multi-drawing and you should now see the weld mark in the multi-drawing.

Revision Control If you are sending multi-drawings to your clients then obviously you will need to add a revision mark to the multi-drawing. To add a revision mark:

Create revision

1. Highlight the drawing on the list.

2. Click the Revision… button.

3. Add a revision mark, date and text to the dialog.

4. Click Create.

You can see that drawing was marked on the list as having revision A.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 464: Tekla Basic

Open the drawing. You should see that the revision has also been added to you revision block.

Several drawings can share the same revision mark, date, and information. To attach the same revision information to several drawings simultaneously, select multiple drawings from the drawing list.

You can choose whether Tekla Structures shows the revision numbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. By default, revision numbers are shown. For more information, see the following links: Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Defining drawing revisions Help: System > Files and folders > Startup batch file.

n rols and following that is a group of

settings that will give you the desired part marks.

-------

!!! m set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=NONE

ND_PARTS

OR=NONE

Use assembly position as part position for LOOSE_PART or MAIN_PART

WX kmnprstvwx

=3

AWINGS=1 m set XS_SWITCH_POS_NUMBERS_FOR=PARTS

14.4 Multinumbering tutorial The numbering section of the batch file is shown below for reference. The following is aexplanation of what each line in the batch file cont

Numbering Section of Batch File rem *** Numbering ----------------------------------------rem Use standard numbering prefix in multi numbering rem for NONE or ASSEMBLIES or PARTS or ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS rem WARNING!!! DO NOT CHANGE THIS SWITCH DURING A PROJECTre rem set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES_Arem set XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=NONE rem set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_Frem set XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART rem rem set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=NONE rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDFGHJKMNPRSTVrem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS=abcdfghjrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERSrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=3 rem set XS_ALLOW_DRAWING_TO_MANY_MULTI_DRre

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 465: Tekla Basic

rem set XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING= rem set XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING=

Description of Batch File Lines XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=

When part and assembly numbering is based on drawing numbers, multinumbering is used. The environment variable XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR can be set to NONE, ASSEMBLIES, PARTS or ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS, defining whether the multinumbering will affect assemblies, parts or both. For example, if it is set and equal to ASSEMBLIES, we can achieve an assembly mark of something like:

10B1

10B2

10B3

If we have it set also to PARTS, we can achieve a part mark of something like:

10a1

10a2

10a3

Where 10 is the drawing number a is the Part prefix and 1 designates that it is the first part on the sheet.

For multinumbers to be assigned to parts, the single part views need to be turned on in the assembly drawing when the assembly drawing is linked to the multi-drawing.

XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=

The environment variable XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR can be set to NONE, ASSEMBLIES, PARTS or ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS, defining whether the model prefix will affect the type of mark assemblies, parts or both get.

For example, if this variable is set to none, a column with that main part having an Assembly prefix C, when attached to a multi-drawing would get a mark of

A10

B10

C10

If this variable is set to ASSEMBLIES, this same column would get a mark of

AC10

BC10

CC10

XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=

Whether the part and assembly number prefixes influence the numbering of parts and assemblies in a multi-drawing can be defined with this environment variable. The four options are NONE, ASSEMBLIES, PARTS and ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.

For three parts on the same sheet, two having an Assembly prefix of C and another one having a prefix of B. With this variable set to NONE, we would get the following marks:

AC10, BC10, CB10

1C10, 2C10, 3B10

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 466: Tekla Basic

With this variable set to ASSEMBLIES, we would get the following marks:

AC10, BC10, AB10

1C10, 2C10, 1B10

XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=

By setting the environment variable XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS to ASSEMBLIES, PARTS or ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS, then numeric multinumbers are used for assemblies, parts or assemblies and parts, respectively.

As seen above the marks AC10, BC10, CB10 would become 1C10, 2C10, 3B10.

A -> 1

B -> 2

C -> 3

XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=

Note that each piece of an assembly has its own individual mark as well as the assembly mark that it is attached to. Main part and loose parts (secondary parts of the assembly) that make up an assembly can however take the assembly mark if this variable is set appropriately.

Options are MAIN_PART or LOOSE_PART.

This essentially means that the Part Number series in the part dialog box will be ignored.

XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=

The order of the multi-drawing number and part or assembly number in the multinumber can be set with the environment variable XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR. The four options are: NONE, ASSEMBLIES, PARTS and ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.

For example, if the line is set equal to ASSEMBLIES, then AC10, BC10, CB10 would become: 10AC, 10BC, 10CB.

XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=

This line defines the valid characters available for use when designating assembly marks. If the line

XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= is set equal to ASSEMBLIES, then this line is ignored.

Assembly marks will be made AC10, BC10… XC10 then AAC10, ABC10… and so on. Make certain to exclude any characters you wish to not use.

XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS=

If not using numeric multinumbers, this line specifies the minimum amount of characters to use when assigning an assembly mark. By default this number is two, which would produce marks like those above. If set to 2 then the same assemblies would receive marks like: AAC10, ABC10, ACC10…

XS_ALLOW_DRAWING_TO_MANY_MULTI_DRAWINGS=

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 467: Tekla Basic

This environment variable is used for defining whether the drawings already included in a multi-drawing are also to be included in a new multi-drawing that is being created. If any value is defined for this environment variable it is possible to include the same drawings more than one multi-drawing. By default, a certain drawing can only be included in one multi-drawing.

XS_SWITCH_POS_NUMBERS_FOR=

This variable swaps the prefix defined in the Tekla Structure assembly and/or part mark to become a suffix (A1 > 1A). The options are NONE, PARTS, ASSEMBLIES, ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS. This setting is only available for use with assembly drawings.

Changing the order of the multinumber content is easily done by switching order of elements with following batch file variables:

rem set XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING= %%PART_PREFIX%% %%PART_MULTI_DRAWING_POS%% %%PART_MULTI_DRAWING_NUMBER%% rem set XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING= %%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%% %%ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRAWING_POS%% %%ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRAWING_NUMBER%%

Note that anything which is outside %% will always be output, so you can include for instance parentheses to the mark e.g. 1B(101).

Settings for Assembly Numbers g

. The user can determine different

ld overlap n the user if this happens).

ox:

Standard marks for assemblies when not using multi-drawings and multinumbering. UsinPrefixes and start numbers for a range of types: B1, B2, B3… C1, C2, C3. Beams using prefix B and start number 1 will continue as B1, B2, B3 etcprefixes for different parts if required – i.e. C for column.

Different start numbers enable an alternative way of phasing – i.e. B501 Care must be taken not to overlap numbers if this method is used (e.g. 521 beams in the series B1 wouwith beams in series B501! – Tekla Structure does war

Set up the Prefix and Start number in part dialog b

Using Multi-Drawings and Enabling the Use of Multinumbers Assembly Marks – A1, B1, C1…

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 468: Tekla Basic

set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=NONE

RS_FOR=NONE

FGHJKMNPRSTVWX ARACTERS=3

et XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

Set up the following Environment Variables:

ING_FOR=NONE

NONE

FGHJKMNPRSTVWX ARACTERS=3

et XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

101B3, 101C4, 101C5…

=NONE

ASSEMBLIES

FGHJKMNPRSTVWX ARACTERS=3

et XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

101B3, 101C1, 101C2…

= ASSEMBLIES

ASSEMBLIES

FGHJKMNPRSTVWX ARACTERS=3

et XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

3B101, 4C101, 5C101…

= NONE

_FOR= ASSEMBLIES

FGHJKMNPRSTVWX ARACTERS=3

et XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

3B101, 1C101, 2C101…

Set up the following Environment Variables

= ASSEMBLIES

_FOR= ASSEMBLIES

FGHJKMNPRSTVWX

set XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=NONE set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBEset XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=NONE rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHs

Assembly Marks – 1A, 1B, 1C…

set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=NONE set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= ASSEMBLIES rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHs

Assembly Marks – 101B1, 101B2,

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FORset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= ASSEMBLIES set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= ASSEMBLIES rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHs

Assembly Marks – 101B1, 101B2,

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FORset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= ASSEMBLIES set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= ASSEMBLIES rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHs

Assembly Marks – 1B101, 2B101,

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FORset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= ASSEMBLIES set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERSset XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHs

Assembly Marks – 1B101, 2B101,

set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FORset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= ASSEMBLIES set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERSset XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCD

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 469: Tekla Basic

rem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS=3 et XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

101BC, 101CD, 101CF…

NG_FOR=NONE

ASSEMBLIES

KMNPRSTVWX ARACTERS=2

et XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

101BC, 101CA, 101CB…

NG_FOR= ASSEMBLIES

ASSEMBLIES

KMNPRSTVWX ARACTERS=2

et XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

CB101, AC101, BC101…

Set up the following Environment Variables:

NG_FOR= ASSEMBLIES

_FOR= ASSEMBLIES

KMNPRSTVWX ARACTERS=2

et XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

CB101, DC101, FC101…

Set up the following Environment Variables:

NG_FOR= NONE

_FOR= ASSEMBLIES

KMNPRSTVWX ARACTERS=2

set XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR=MAIN_PART

c. The user can determine different prefixes for different parts if required, i.e. for angle.

ld overlap with p501 happens).

Set up Prefix and Start numbers in the part properties dialog box:

s

Assembly Marks – 101BA, 101B2,

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERIset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= ASSEMBLIES set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDFGHJrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHs

Assembly Marks – 101BA, 101B2,

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERIset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= ASSEMBLIES set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDFGHJrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHs

Assembly Marks – AB101, BB101,

set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERIset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERSset XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDFGHJrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHs

Assembly Marks – AB101, BB101,

set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=ASSEMBLIES set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERIset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERSset XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABCDFGHJrem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CH

Settings for Secondary Part Numbers Standard marks on secondary parts when not using multi-drawings and multinumbering. Using Prefixes and start numbers for a range of types: a1, a2, a3…, p1, p2, p3… Plates using prefix p and start number 1, will continue as p1, p2, p3, et

a

Different start numbers enable an alternative way of phasing – i.e. p501 Care must be taken not to overlap numbers if this method is used (521 beams in the series p1 woubeams in series ! – Tekla Structure does warn the user if this

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 470: Tekla Basic

Set up the Prefix and Start number in a typical joint dialog box Parts page:

The Prefix and Start number will be taken from the Options dialog when connection dialog fields are left empty (Setup > Options…).

Remember, for multinumbers to be assigned to parts, the single part views need to be turned on in the assembly drawing when the assembly drawing is linked to the multi-drawing.

Because this part of this document is referring to secondary part marks, the following batch file lines are shown as set =PARTS. Depending on the format of the Assembly marks these lines may need to be set to ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS (see above). Those lines shown as et =NONE maybe likewise effected by the Assembly marks.

ING_FOR=NONE

RS_FOR=NONE

dfghjkmnprstvwx

em set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=3

s

Part Marks – a1, b1, c1…

Set up the following Environment Variables:set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=PARTS

set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBER

set XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=NONE

set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBE

set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=NONE

rem set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abc

r

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 471: Tekla Basic

Part Marks – 1a, 1b, 1c…

Set up the following Environment Variables:

NONE E

em set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abcdfghjkmnprstvwx rem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=3

3, 101p4, 101p5…

NE

em set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abcdfghjkmnprstvwx rem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=3

3, 101p1, 101p2…

ARTS

dfghjkmnprstvwx em set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=3

1, 4p101, 5p101…

ONE RTS

dfghjkmnprstvwx em set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=3

1, 1p101, 2p101…

ARTS RTS

em set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abcdfghjkmnprstvwx rem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=3

c, 101pd, 101pf…

NE

et XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abcdfghjkmnprstvwx

set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=PARTS set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=set XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=NONset XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=NONE set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS r

Part Marks – 101a1, 101a2, 101a

Set up the following Environment Variables:set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=PARTS set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=NO

RTS set XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=PAset XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS r

Part Marks – 101a1, 101a2, 101a

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= PARTS set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= P

RTS set XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR=PAset XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS em set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abcr

r

Part Marks – 1a101, 2a101, 3a10

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= PARTS set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= Nset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PAset XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE em set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abcr

r

Part Marks – 1a101, 2a101, 3a10

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= PARTS set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= Pset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PAset XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE r

Part Marks – 101aa, 101ab, 101a

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= PARTS set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=NO

NE set XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NOset XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS set XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS s

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 472: Tekla Basic

rem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=2

Part Marks – 101aa, 101ab, 101ac, 101pa, 101pb…

ARTS

et XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abcdfghjkmnprstvwx

, ap101, bp101…

BERING_FOR= PARTS

S et XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE

set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abcdfghjkmnprstvwx

, pd101, pf101…

BERING_FOR= NONE

S et XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE

set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS= abcdfghjkmnprstvwx TERS=2

et XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS TS

et XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR=PARTS

prstvwx

o applies when using the system joints. Make certain the field

ld room to place them on the

e NAME field.

Next, select all of your secondary parts and create a multi-drawing of the selected parts with single part drawings. From the pull-down menu:

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= PARTS

BERING_FOR= Pset XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE

TS set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARet XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTS s

srem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=2

Part Marks – aa101, ba101, ca101

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= PARTS set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTs

rem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS=2

Part Marks – aa101, ba101, ca101

Set up the following Environment Variables: set XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR= PARTS set XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMset XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= NONE set XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PARTs

rem set XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARAC

Part Marks – aa, ab, ac, pa, pb…

Set up the following Environment Variables: sset XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR= PAR

Part Marks – a, b, c, d, f…

Set up the following Environment Variables:

s

set XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS=abcdfghjkmn

=> To achieve strictly alpha characters the following steps must be followed.

When entering secondary parts into the model. The part prefix needs to be blank and the start number needs to be 1. This alsunder the label Pos is blank and the field under No is 1. This will produce part marks that are strictly numeric. i.e. 1, 2, 3…

Create or load multi-drawing properties that specify an extremely large sheet so that it woube impossible to create enough single parts drawings to run out ofmulti-drawing. Also, VERY IMPORTANT! The NAME of the drawing must be blank. This can only be accomplished by placing a space in th

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 473: Tekla Basic

As the single part drawings are linked to the multi-drawing the part marks change from 1, 2, 3 to a, b, c.

Note that if more than one multi-drawing is created (because there is not enough room on the multi-drawing to place any more parts) the next drawing will get 1 for a name and then the parts will have marks 1a, 1b, 1c…

If more secondary parts are added after the original multi-drawing is made single part drawings of those pieces need to be made and then they need to be linked to the original multi-drawing that has no name.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Multi-drawing and Multinumbering

Page 474: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 April 26, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 475: Tekla Basic
Page 476: Tekla Basic

Contents

15 Collaboration ............................................................................................................... 3

15.1 Import of Reference Models ......................................................................................................3 15.2 Defining Visibility and User Attributes ........................................................................................4 15.3 Snapping and Picking to Reference Models ..............................................................................5 15.4 Handling Reference Models ......................................................................................................6 15.5 Export Reference Model of Tekla Structures Model ..................................................................8 15.6 Publish Model as a Web Page.................................................................................................10 15.7 Multiuser Mode ........................................................................................................................11

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING i Collaboration

Page 477: Tekla Basic
Page 478: Tekla Basic

15 Collaboration

This chapter introduces the principles of working with reference models in Tekla Structures. Reference models are usually models from other systems – e.g. pipes, equipments etc. made by process industry systems. It is important to see those pipes and equipments to be able to model steel or concrete structure around them avoiding collisions. Reference models can be dxf, dwg or dgn format. Also Tekla Structures use in multiuser mode is explained.

In this chapter

We will first import some HVAC (heating, ventilation, air-conditioning) and Process Industry (pipes, equipments) dwg files. Reference models can be created by using e.g. Autocad, Magicad, Cadmatic, PDS, PDMS etc. programs. Then we train what kind of possibilities you have when working with reference models.

15.1 Import of Reference Models See Help: Reference models->using one model.

1. Double click the Create reference object icon. Create DWG reference object

2. Browse first reference file (HVAC_air_RefModel.dwg) under ReferenceModels folder.

3. Click OK.

4. Pick position to global origin.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Collaboration

Page 479: Tekla Basic

It is good to have a separate view where to pick origin point and in other view you can see the appearing reference model.

Import also other reference models under folder ReferenceModels in the same way.

It can take some CPU time when importing large reference models. It can be optimized e.g. by defining number of segments used in reference pipes.

See Help: Reference models->Handling large reference models.

15.2 Defining Visibility and User Attributes It is possible to define visibility and user defined attributes in reference model dialog.

1. Start command File->Reference objects… Reference object dialog appears. Edit the description of reference file

2. Double click to HVAC_air_RefModel.dwg reference file. Reference object properties dialog appears.

3. Press User defined attributes… button. User attribute dialog appears.

4. Add info text Water pipes + equipments to description field of user attributes dialog (Reference (1) dialog).

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Collaboration

Page 480: Tekla Basic

5. Press Modify button. Description field will be filled in Reference object dialog.

Visibility can be defined for many reference models even at same time. Change the visibility of reference file 1. Select HVAC reference file rows in reference object dialog while pressing Shift button.

2. Change visibility option to Invisible.

3. Change visibility option back to Visible.

User attribute fields in dialog can be defined in objects.inp file.

See Help: Reference models->Using several reference models.

15.3 Snapping and Picking to Reference Models

Tekla Structures recognizes reference models in snapping. You can notice this by creating e.g. construction line to reference model or checking distances of reference model. Note that Snap to geometry lines / points has to be on.

Check the distance from edge of lavatory pipe to edge of I-beam. Create a free measure to check available space 1. Select hollow core slab near to toilet and choose from pop up menu Hide command.

2. Start Create free measure command. Note: Select objects in components has to be on. Switch also Snap to perpendicular points to on.

3. Pick first point to edge of pipe of toilet. You can rotate view to make picking correct point easier.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Collaboration

Page 481: Tekla Basic

4. Pick second point to edge of I-beam. Use perpendicular point.

5. Result of distance can be seen on left bottom corner. Distance in x-coordinate direction is 289 mm which is ok.

15.4 Handling Reference Models Only reference models which are inside work area will be visible. For example defining work area correct you can get only reference models visible you need. DGN-format reference models are also clipped if environment XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING is defined. Switching Xsnap off increases picking speed.

See Help: Reference models->Handling large reference models.

Phase numbers effect also to reference models and it is a good way in filtering. Change the phase number of HVAC reference models 1. Select command Properties->Phase number… to get Phase manager dialog visible.

2. Press Add button 2 times to get 2 more phase number rows.

3. Add comments HVAC water and HVAC air to new phase lines.

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Collaboration

Page 482: Tekla Basic

4. Select HVAC_water reference file and press Modify phase button.

5. Select HVAC_air reference file and press Modify phase button.

6. Double click to view to get View properties dialog and press Filter… button.

7. Add new phase numbers to Phase number field and put Not option on.

8. Press Modify button and HVAC* reference files will be filtered out from view.

In View setup dialog box (Properties -> View… -> Display…) you can define if you want to see reference models.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Collaboration

Page 483: Tekla Basic

15.5 Export Reference Model of Tekla Structures Model

Tekla Structures model can be exported to other systems (e.g. PDS, PDMS,Cadmatic) by using 3D dgn, 3D dxf or other formats. This is needed to ensure structural model fits to e.g. process model of pipes, equipments etc. In this example you will create a 3D dgn reference model and still import it back to model.

1. Select desired parts (e.g. whole model). Export model in 3D dgn format

2. Start command File->Export->3d DGN.

Output file (Model.dgn) will be created to model folder.

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Collaboration

Page 484: Tekla Basic

Work in the same way as earlier. Create a DGN reference model of existing structural model for checking purpose

1. Double click the Create reference object icon.

2. Browse the reference file (Model.dgn).

3. Click OK.

4. Pick position to global origin.

You can check situation e.g. defining another view and displaying only reference models.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Collaboration

Page 485: Tekla Basic

15.6 Publish Model as a Web Page Tekla Structures model can be published as a web page. Then other persons can watch the model using Internet Explorer (so Tekla Structures is not needed). This is easy and effective way to show e.g. current status of model.

1. Start command File->Publish as Web page… Publish model as a web page

2. Press Publish button.

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation Collaboration

Page 486: Tekla Basic

Separate Tekla Web Viewer window appears.

See Help: Tekla WebViewer.

In the Tekla Web Viewer model you can pan, fly, rotate model etc.

See Help: Tekla WebViewer -> How to move and zoom ?

15.7 Multiuser Mode In multiuser mode several persons can work in a same model at same time. In big models it is often necessary. Using multiuser mode is an easy and efficient way to handle projects but it needs some settings and it is recommendable to read Tekla Structures Online help pages.

See Help: Multiuser mode.

Example of multiuser modeling you can find in:

Help: 2.2. Modeling in multiuser mode-> working with a master model.

See also Help: Guidelines for multiuser drawings.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Collaboration

Page 487: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures Basic Training

Tekla Structures 10.0 March 30, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Page 488: Tekla Basic

Contents

17 Analysis and Design ................................................................................................... 1

17.1 Analysis Model ..........................................................................................................................2 17.2 Restraints ................................................................................................................................17 17.3 Create Analysis Model.............................................................................................................20

Page 489: Tekla Basic

17 Analysis and Design

This lesson describes the basic functions of Analysis and Design. We will learn how to create and manage loads and load groups, how to make load combinations and create analysis model, and view the analysis results in STAADpro2003 program and in Tekla Structures. We will also learn how to optimize the steel profiles using the analysis results.

In this lesson

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 1 Analysis and Design

Page 490: Tekla Basic

17.1 Analysis Model In this exercise we will build an analysis model and run the analysis.

Analysis model build-up can be divided into 5 steps:

1. Create load groups and define loads. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Loads > Grouping loads

2. Apply point, line and area loads to model. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Loads > Distributing loads

3. Define Restraints for each member in the model by creating supports and defining member connectivity to intermediate nodes. See more in Tekla Structures help: Modeling > Parts > Member end conditions

4. Select members and create a new analysis model. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Analysis and design > Following through structural analysis

5. Define Load combinations. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Analysis and design > Load combination

After these steps, you can run the analysis.

Create Load Groups and Define Loads A load group is a set of loads that are treated alike in the load combination. You can group loads that are caused by the same action. This implies that the loads in a group have the common partial safety factors and the same action direction. They also act always at the same time and all together.

Every load has to belong to a load group. One load cannot be attached to several load groups, but a load group may have only one load on it. Loads in a load group can be of any load type (point, line, area, etc.), and you can include as many loads as you want in a load group.

To define load groups, select Loads > Load groups on the Properties pull-down menu. In the appearing Load group properties dialog box you can add new load groups, modify and delete existing load groups, name load groups, and define the load group type and direction.

Define load groups

1. Push Add… button in the Load group properties dialog box to create a new load group…

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 2 Analysis and Design

Page 491: Tekla Basic

…a new load group named "Group name1" appears.

2. Change load group name to Live1. Load group type can remain as Live load / housing and direction can remain as Z.

3. Push Add… to create another new load group.

4. Change load group name to Live2.

5. Change load group type to Live load / housing, direction can remain as Z.

Every load group must have a unique name, which can be used in filtering and for expressing

The type of a load group is the type of the action that causes the loads in the load group. Actions, and thereby also load group types, are design code specific. The direction of a load group is the global direction of the action that causes the loads.

6. Change load color by picking new color from pull-down list.

7. Push Add… to create another new load group.

8. Change load group name to Wind left.

9. Change load group type to Wind load

10. Change load direction to X.

11. Change load color by picking new color from pull-down list.

12. Push Add… to create another new load group.

13. Change load group name to Wind right.

14. Change load group type to Wind load

15. Change load direction to X.

16. Change load color by picking new color from pull-down list.

17. Push Add… to create another new load group.

18. Change load group name to Snow.

19. Change load group type to Snow load Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 3 Analysis and Design

Page 492: Tekla Basic

20. Change load direction to X.

21. Change load color by picking new color from pull-down list.

You have now defined load groups and you have two different winds, which cannot affect at the same time. Therefore you need to modify them and set Incompatible number for wind loads. Use same incompatible number for both to set them incompatible.

Modify load groups

1. Change Incompatible number of Wind left to 1.

2. Change Incompatible number of Wind right to 1.

The wind loading from left is incompatible with the wind loading from right. In load combination, only one of the load groups within an incompatible grouping is taken into consideration at a time.

Create Loads After modeling the physical structures by creating parts and defining load groups you can add loads to the model.

Loads are modeled as objects and you can copy, move, edit or delete them like any other object in the model. Loads in a structure can be defined as point load, line load, area load with uniform or variable intensity and temperature load. You can model loads to be independent of the structural parts, or they can be attached to parts. Tekla Structures also generates the self-weigh of the structure and use it as uniformly distributed member loads in analysis.

See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Loads > Load types and properties > Load types

Create Point load

We will now create a suspension load using point load type.

1. Doubleclick Create point load icon. Point load properties dialog opens. Define point load properties

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 4 Analysis and Design

Page 493: Tekla Basic

2. Select Snow from Group name list. The list has all the load groups, which you have created and defined.

3. Open Magnitude tab on the Point load properties dialog.

4. Define point load magnitude to –2 kN in Pz field.

5. Open Distribution tab on the Point load properties dialog.

6. Define load attachement. In Part names select Include and write BEAM to the name field. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Loads > Distributing loads > Attaching loads to parts or locations

7. Set bounding box of the load to 1200 in each direction. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Loads > Distributing loads > Applying loads to parts

8. Click OK.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 5 Analysis and Design

Page 494: Tekla Basic

Now create a point load and copy it to a beam on grid line B, between lines 2 and 3. Here the point load is representing suspension load.

Create point load

1. Open the 3D view on level.

2. Zoom in to a top corner on grid lines A' and 2'

3. Pick Create point load icon.

4. Point position to the middle of the column top. A point load object is created.

5. Select Interrupt from rightclick menu to end the command.

Copy point load We will next copy the point load.

1. Select the point load you just created.

2. Rightclick and select Copy > Translate from the list

3. Fill the Copy translate dialog fields: -500 in dY-direction, Number of copies 5.

4. Press Copy. Tekla Structures copies the point load 5 times to given direction.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 6 Analysis and Design

Page 495: Tekla Basic

5. Select all point loads.

6. Now copy the load 1500 mms in x-direction Copy > Translate command, number of copies is 11.

Create Line load We will now create additional snow loads using line load type.

1. Doubleclick Create line load icon. Define line load properties

2. Select Snow from Group name list.

3. Select uniformly distributed load as a load form.

4. Open Magnitude tab on the Line load properties dialog.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 7 Analysis and Design

Page 496: Tekla Basic

7. Set magnitude to -12 kN/m in P1z field.

8. Open Distribution tab on the Line load properties dialog.

9. Define load attachement. In Part names select Include and write BEAM to the name field. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Loads > Distributing loads > Attaching loads to parts or locations

10. Set bounding box of the load to 1200 in each direction. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Loads > Distributing loads > Applying loads to parts

11. Click OK.

Create line loads

Now create line loads on top of the roof on grid line 1. Here the line load represents snow load.

1. Open a view named GRID 1

2. Zoom in to upper beams.

3. Pick Create line load icon.

4. Point start position to the intersection of column top and grid line A.

5. Point end position to the intersection of column top and grid line B.

6. Repeat for another line load: point start position to the intersection of beam top and grid line B.

7. Point end position to the intersection of column top and grid line C.

8. Select Interrupt from rightclick menu to end the command.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 8 Analysis and Design

Page 497: Tekla Basic

Copy line load We will next copy the line loads.

1. Select the line loads you just created.

2. Rightclick and select Copy > Translate from the list

3. Fill the Copy translate dialog fields: 6000 in dY-direction, Number of copies 3.

4. Press Copy. Tekla Structures copies the line loads.

Define new line load properties

We will next create wind loads using the line load.

1. Doubleclick Create line load icon.

2. Select Wind right from Group name list.

3. Select load form, which has different magnitudes at the ends of the loaded length.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 9 Analysis and Design

Page 498: Tekla Basic

4. Open Magnitude tab on the Line load properties dialog.

5. Fill P1x -2.5 kN/m and P2x -3.0 kN/m

6. Open Distribution tab page the Line load properties dialog.

7. Write COLUMN into Part names field.

8. Set bounding box to be 1200 mms in each direction.

9. Set offset value 500 mms to the start (a filed)

10. Press OK to close the dialog.

Create new line loads

1. In 3D view, zoom in to the concrete column on 1 and C grid lines' intersection.

2. Pick Create line load icon.

3. Point start position to the intersection of column bottom and grid line 1.

4. Point end position to the intersection of column top.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 10 Analysis and Design

Page 499: Tekla Basic

Tekla Structures creates a line load, which has different magnitudes at the ends and which starts 500 mms from the definition point.

Next define new values for a new line load: use same values as previously, but change P1x to be -3.0 kN/m and P2x to be -3.5 kN/m and remove the offset from starting point.

Then Create a line load to the steel column on 1 and C grid lines' intersection, on top of the concrete column.

Copy line load We will next copy the line loads.

1. Select the wind line loads you just created.

2. Rightclick and select Copy > Translate from the list

3. Fill the Copy translate dialog fields: 6000 in dY-direction, Number of copies 3.

4. Press Copy. Tekla Structures copies the line loads.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 11 Analysis and Design

Page 500: Tekla Basic

Next create Wind left line loads to the opposite side, on grid line A steel columns using same load form, P1x 2.5 kN/m and P2x -3.5 kN/m magnitude values, and 500 mms offset in starting point.

Create Area load We will now create live loads using area load type.

Define area load properties

1. Doubleclick Create area load icon.

2. Select live1 from Group name list.

3. Select quadrangular load as a load form.

4. Open Magnitude tab on the Area load properties dialog.

5. Set magnitude to -8.00 kN/m² in P1z, P2z and P3z fields. Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 12 Analysis and Design

Page 501: Tekla Basic

6. Open Distribution tab on the Area load properties dialog.

7. Set bounding box of the load to 1200 in each direction. Set off set from sides to – 300 mms. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Loads > Distributing loads > Applying loads to parts

8. Click OK.

Create area load: Live load1

We will next define live 1 load by 3 points on top of slab in level +3500.

1. Open the Plan +3500 view. Check that you work on view plane.

2. Zoom in to the intersection of grid lines C and 4.

3. Pick Create area load icon.

4. Point start position to grid line intersection.

5. Point second position to another grid line intersection

6. Point end position again to grid line intersection.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 13 Analysis and Design

Page 502: Tekla Basic

We will next define and create live2 load to level +7000. Define first the load parameters:

Create area load: Live load2

1. Doubleclick Create area load icon.

2. Select Live2 from Group name list.

3. Select quadrangular load as a load form.

4. Open Magnitude tab on the Area load properties dialog.

5. Set magnitude to -6 kN/m² in all Pz fields.

6. Open Distribution tab page.

7. Set bounding box of the load to 1200 in each direction.

8. Set offset to -100 mms

9. Click OK.

Now create the area load Live2:

1. Open view Plane +7000.

2. Pick Create area load icon.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 14 Analysis and Design

Page 503: Tekla Basic

3. Point start position to the intersection of grid lines A and 1.

4. Point second position to another grid line intersection.

5. Point end position again to grid line intersection.

Create Uniform load We will next create a uniformly distributed load, which is a linearly distributed load/force that is inside a polygonal (distribution/loaded) area. We will also add an opening to the polygon.

1. Pick Create uniform load icon.

2. Select Live1 from Group name list. Define Uniform

load properties 3. Open Magnitude tab on the Uniform load properties dialog.

4. Set magnitude to –2.0 kN/m² in P1z field.

5. Open Distribution tab on the Uniform load properties dialog

6. Set bounding box to 1200 in each direction.

7. Set offset to -100 mms.

8. Close the dialog by pressing OK.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15 Analysis and Design

Page 504: Tekla Basic

Add uniform load to level +7000 by picking polygon shape and opening shape, then executing command by middle mouse click.

Create uniform load

1. Pick polygon shape (points 1 - 5) and close the outermost polygon to starting point (point 5)

2. Continue picking the points of the holes (points 6 - 14) and close the inner polygon (point 14). You can do this clockwise or counterclockwise.

3. Finish command with middle button.

Tekla Structures creates an uniform load, which is cut around the silo.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 16 Analysis and Design

Page 505: Tekla Basic

17.2 Restraints To get a valid analysis model that can be solved with FEM analysis engine, we need to specify the supports and member end or edge releases. To define the correct values in the analysis model the information should be stored in model. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Analysis and Design > Member end connectivity

Define Restraints for Members We will now define restraints first to beams having point and line loads.

1. Double click any beam and open Beam properties dialog box.

2. Open Start releases tab page

3. Set Support condition to "Connected"

4. Open End releases tab page

5. Set Support condition to "Connected"

6. Untick all dialog fields by pushing On/off button (between Get and Cancel buttons)

7. Tick Support condition on Start and End releases tab pages

8. Select all the beams, which have point, line or area loads.

9. Push Modify. Only support conditions are modified.

We will next define restraints to all columns.

1. Double click any column and open Column properties dialog box.

2. Open Start releases tab page

3. Set Support condition to "Supported"

4. Open End releases tab page

5. Set Support condition to "Connected"

6. Untick all dialog fields by pushing On/off button (between Get and Cancel buttons)

7. Tick Support condition on Start and End releases tab pages

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 17 Analysis and Design

Page 506: Tekla Basic

8. Select all the columns.

9. Push Modify. Only support conditions are modified.

We will next define restraints to bracings.

1. Double click any beam and open Beam properties dialog box.

2. Open Start releases tab page

3. Set Support condition to "Connected", which allows rotation.

4. Open End releases tab page

5. Set Support condition to "Connected", which allows rotation.

6. Untick all dialog fields by pushing On/off button (between Get and Cancel buttons)

7. Tick Support condition on Start and End releases tab pages

8. Open Select filter dialog

9. Write BRACE to Name field on Part tab page.

10. Close the Select filter dialog by pressing OK.

11. Area select all the bracings.

12. Press Modify on the Beam properties dialog box. Only support conditions are modified.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 18 Analysis and Design

Page 507: Tekla Basic

13. Select Standard from Select filter list to return to normal selection.

Then set the analysis conditions for the in situ slab.

1. Double click the slab and open Slab properties dialog box.

2. Open Analysis tab page

3. Set member analysis type to "Normal"

4. Select Triangular element type

5. Press Modify

6. Close the dialog by pressing OK or Cancel.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 19 Analysis and Design

Page 508: Tekla Basic

17.3 Create Analysis Model The model Structures are analyzed by using the finite element method (FEM). All the input data required and the results generated in the structural analysis constitutes an analysis model. The analysis model consists of nodes, elements/members, loads, restraints, constraints, and other related information. When starting the structural analysis, Tekla Structures generates an analysis model of the corresponding physical and load models. This includes the splitting of physical parts into analysis members, node generation for the members, additional analysis member generation, support condition determination, load splitting, and load division for the analysis members. See more in Tekla Structures help: Analysis > Analysis and Design > Analysis model properties

Create a New Analysis Model

Before creating the analysis model, check that you have the correct load modeling code selected. From Setup pull down menu, select Analysis load modeling… Use the Analysis load modeling dialog box to determine the building code and safety factors Tekla Structures uses in load combination.

1. Select all loads and members except pad footings and strip footings. Define analysis model attributes

2. In Analysis drop down menu select New model…

3. Give a name to the analysis model: Full model

4. Set creation method to "By selected parts and loads"

5. Set member axis to "Reference axis" Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 20 Analysis and Design

Page 509: Tekla Basic

6. Set Node definition to "Use rigid links"

7. Open the Analysis tab page

8. Set analysis method to 1st order.

9. Open Design-Steel tab page

10. Select the "EC3" code from Desing code

11. Set design method to Check design.

12. Open Design-Concrete tab page

13. Select the "EC2" code from Desing code

14. Set design method to Calculate reguired area.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 21 Analysis and Design

Page 510: Tekla Basic

15. Press OK. Tekla Structures constructs the analysis model.

Before running the analysis we need to define the load combination, which will be used in analysis.

Define load combinations

1. Select the analysis model in Analysis & Design models dialog.

2. Press Load combinations...

3. Load combinations dialog opens. Press Generate… button to use automatic

load combination generation.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 22 Analysis and Design

Page 511: Tekla Basic

4. Tick all combination options.

5. Press OK to insert the combinations to Load combinations list.

Note that self weight can be included automatically.

Tekla Structures generates load combinations using code specific partial safety factors.

6. Add a new combination, which has modified partial safety factors by pressing

New… button.

7. Select combination type to be "ULS-Ultimate limit state".

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 23 Analysis and Design

Page 512: Tekla Basic

8. Enter name "Extra snow" for the load combination

9. Move load groups "Snow", "Wind right" and "Self weight" from Loads available list to Combinations by selecting the loads an pressing the + button.

10. Change the Partial safety factor of "Snow" from 1.50 to 1.75

11. Press OK to insert the load combinations to the Load combinations list.

12. Press OK to accept the load combinations and to insert them into the analysis model.

Analysis Model Calculation and Result Viewing

Run the calculation

Analysis model is now ready to be analyzed using STAADpro2003.

1. Select the analysis model.

2. Press Run to start analysis.

3. STAADpro2003 analyses the model and writes an .anl file, which will be saved in Model_folder \Analysis directory. Press Done to close the dialog.

Analysis model has now been analyzed and the results can be seen in STAADpro2003.

View results Press View results button.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 24 Analysis and Design

Page 513: Tekla Basic

STAADpro2003 program opens in post prosessing mode.

Check the Output File During the analysis process, Tekla Structures creates an Output file. This file provides important information on whether the analysis was performed properly. For example, if Tekla Structures encounters an instability problem during the analysis process, it will be reported in the output file.

1. Push the Output file icon to open the file.

2. Check if there are any warnings in list on the left side.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 25 Analysis and Design

Page 514: Tekla Basic

3. Select the warning in the list.

4. Find the cause of the warning from the text on the right. There is usually the node number, which you can locate in the STAAD- model.

5. Find the node number in the Node displacements list. The node is highlighted in

STAAD model and you can use zoom window to have a closer look. Shift + N shows the node numbers in the view.

Check Results Both Graphically and Numerically in STAADpro2003

Steel members We can now check result windows in STAADpro2003. Start by checking that the loads are correct.

Check loads 1. Open Beam > Graphs tab page on the left side of the result window.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 26 Analysis and Design

Page 515: Tekla Basic

2. Select corresponding load group LG2 from View toolbar

The loads in the selected group are displayed.

3. Pick Load edit cursor icon from Selection toolbar.

4. Doubleclick a load to see the properties

5. Check that load magnitude and direction are the same as you have set in Structures load model.

6. Select next load group from View toolbar to see the loads.

7. Doubleclick line load using Load edit cursor to see the properties.

8. Repeat for remaining load groups.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 27 Analysis and Design

Page 516: Tekla Basic

You can view the member end forces in graphical and tabular forms. Check Axial forces, Shear forces in Y and Z directions, Torsion and Bending moments in Y and Z directions. The scale factor for plotting the diagram may be changed using the menu option Results > Scale > Scales tab.

Check member forces

1. To view the forces, open Beam > Forces tab page on the left side of the result window.

2. Select member forces from Results toolbar, for example Bending Z and check

visually the model if there are too big bending moments in different load combinations.

3. Select a single beam to see the forces in more detailed form in the list on the right.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 28 Analysis and Design

Page 517: Tekla Basic

4. Steel detailing tab shows the critical load combination for the selected beam.

5. On Shear Bending tab, select the critical load combination to see the details.

It is also possible to have more graphics of the forces.

1. To view detailed force graphics select Beam > Graphs tab page on the left side of the result window. STAADpro2003 opens new graphical windows to view the Mz, Fy and Fx forces.

2. Select a beam from the model. The force values are displayed.

Check member stresses Member stresses can be printed at specified intermediate sections as well as at the

start and end joints.

1. To view the stresses, open Beam > Stresses tab page on the left side of the result window.

2. Select a beam from the model. STAADpro2003 shows the stresses graphically and in tabular forms.

3. Move the handle in the Select section plane dialog to view stress values in wanted distance from the end of beam.

4. Tick the Display Legend and Display Corner Stress options to view them in the window.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 29 Analysis and Design

Page 518: Tekla Basic

5. Push Add Stress to Table button to save the stress values at given distance. The values can later be called into a report.

When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have passed the code or have failed; the critical condition of the code (any of the compression, tension, shear, etc.); the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for a value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member) of forces in the member where the critical condition occurs. The colors and limits for safe and failed members for plotting the diagram may be changed using the menu option Results > Scale > Design Results tab.

Utility Check

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 30 Analysis and Design

Page 519: Tekla Basic

1. To view the Utility check results, open Beam > Utility Check tab page on the left side of the result window.

2. Select Failed members from the tabular data on the right.

3. Select a row from the Failed members list to activate the member in the model.

4. Double click the failed member to see more detailed data in the Beam dialog.

Creating Customized Reports, Plotting Result Diagrams

The Report menu options display various numerical results in tabular form. The results may be sorted in ascending or descending order. Each table appears as a separate window on screen and may be saved and included in a Custom Report.

1. Select the Reports tab page on the left side of the result window.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 31 Analysis and Design

Page 520: Tekla Basic

Report Setup dialog opens.

2. Select the Items tab page.

3. Select Output under Available section.

4. Select the results you want in the report under Available section and move them to the Selected section using the arrow button.

5. Open the Load Cases tab page to select the load cases, which you want to display in the report.

6. By default all load cases are selected. To remove a load case from the selected list pick the row and push the arrow button.

7. Then define if you want the results to be grouped by Load Case or by Node/Beam

8. To save the report settings open the Load/Save tab page.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 32 Analysis and Design

Page 521: Tekla Basic

9. Push the Save as... button and write the name of the report into the dialog.

10. Close the Save Report dialog by pressing OK.

11. Close the Report Setup dialog by pressing OK

You can create additional reports from Report pull down menu. First we will create a joint displacement report.

1. Select the nodes you want to the report in the model by using the Nodes cursor.

2. From Report pull down menu select Joint displacement…

3. In Sorting tab page select Absolute Displacement to sort by it.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 33 Analysis and Design

Page 522: Tekla Basic

4. Select Report tab page

5. Write the name for your repot file.

6. Tick Save Report to save the report.

7. Press OK button. The report file opens in tabular form.

To view the report file select the Print preview report command under File menu.

All existing reports are put together in one file. You can display one or two pages of the file at a time by picking the corresponding option on the toolbar. To exit the viewer, push the Close button.

The report file can be save as text file or MS Word file using File > Export report functionality.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 34 Analysis and Design

Page 523: Tekla Basic

Check Results Both Graphically and Numerically in Tekla Structures

The analysis log file can be viewed in Tekla Structures by clicking the Display analysis log icon, which opens the log in result window.

Utility Check You can visualize the utility check results in Tekla Structures.

1. Select Setup > Colors…

2. Select Analysis utility check from the list.

3. Press OK to change the member colors in the model. Note that you must have the analysis model selected in the Analysis & Design models dialog.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 35 Analysis and Design

Page 524: Tekla Basic

The utility check results can also be shown in reports.

1. To select the members of the analysis model and to view the analysis model structure in Tekla Structures, push Select objects button in the Analysis & Design models dialog. The analysis model frame is displayed as red bars inside the physical model.

2. Push the Report icon

3. Select part_utility_ratio_ID report from the list.

4. Push the Create from selected button. Tekla Structures generates a report of the selected members.

5. To select a part from the model, pick a line in the report.

6. Right click and select User defined attributes… from the menu.

7. Select End codes tab page to view forces of the selected part.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 36 Analysis and Design

Page 525: Tekla Basic

You can also call the analysis results for single members from STAADpro2003 into Tekla Structures model.

1. Press Get results in the Analysis & Design models dialog.

2. Double click a beam to view the results in the Beam properties dialog.

3. Push User defined attributes… button.

4. Select End codes tab page.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 37 Analysis and Design

Page 526: Tekla Basic

Optimize the Profiles in the Model According to Analysis Results You can have Tekla Structures to check the profiles of the steel parts in the physical model and suggest the best profiles to use, based on the analysis results. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Analysis > Analysis and Design > Optimizing part size

Tekla Structures creates a design group of steel parts that have the same name and profile. Tekla Structures uses design groups when it searches for the optimal profiles for parts. It assigns the same profile to all parts in a design group.

1. To optimize part sizes, run the analysis and then click Analysis > Optimize....

2. The STAADpro2003 runs the steel design and writes a Full model1_opt.anl file

3. Press the Done button on the dialog to close it. Optimization results dialog opens.

4. Select the BEAM-IPE270 design group on the dialog. All members, which have

the same profile are selected in the model.

5. Using Ctrl – button, unselect the members, which you DON'T want to change.

Leave only beams on +7000 level selected.

6. On Optimization results dialog, press Accept selected for selected objects only button. The selected profiles are changed.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 38 Analysis and Design

Page 527: Tekla Basic

When the optimization is done, the analysis model needs to be updated. If you want to keep the old results select the analysis model on the Analysis & Design models dialog and click Analysis > Freeze results.

1. On Analysis & Design models dialog press Update.

2. Then re-run the analysis by pressing the Run button.

3. Press View results button to open STAADpro2003

4. Check the new results both in STAADpro2003 and in Tekla Structures.

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 39 Analysis and Design